Mil DTL 7700G

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.
com
NOT MEASUREMENT
SENSITIVE
MIL-DTL-7700G (USAF)
13 May 2002
SUPERSEDING
MIL-PRF-7700F(USAF)
1 March 1996
DETAIL SPECIFICATION
FLIGHT MANUALS, AIR REFUELING PROCEDURES,
AND ABBREVIATED CHECKLISTS
This specification is approved for use by the Department of the Air Force and
is available for use by all Departments and Agencies of the Department of
Defense.
1. SCOPE.
1.1 Scope. This detail specification covers the requirements for the preparation of four (4)
types of flight manuals and three (3) types of abbreviated flight manual checklists for all
types of aircraft. This specification also includes air refueling procedures that are to be
incorporated in the flight manuals and checklists. These procedures will provide flight
crews with standard procedures and the data to engage in air refueling operations as
dictated by mission requirements. This specification contains appendices which will allow
for the tagging of flight manual information for digital delivery to the government. These
will allow the flight manual to be prepared in either a paper or electronic presentation. In
addition to “paper” delivery, this specification provides for standard generalized markup
language (SGML) document type definition (DTD) usage (see appendixes A through C). All
appendixes are intended for compliance when required; however, requirements that are not
applicable to a specific aircraft will not be included. Further, any features applicable to a
specific aircraft, but not specified herein, will be included in the manual unless waived by
the acquiring activity (see 6.2).
Beneficial comments (recommendations, additions, deletions) and any pertinent data which may
be of use in improving this document should be addressed to: MSG/MMF, 4375 Chidlaw Road,
Suite 008, Wright-Patterson AFB, OH 45433-5006 by using the Standardization Document
Improvement Proposal (DD Form 1426) appearing at the end of this document or by letter.
AMSC F7030 AREA TMSS
Distribution Statement A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.com
1.2 Types of manuals. The four types of manuals covered by this specification are:
Flight Manual (eight sections) (see 3.3, 3.3.10, and 6.2)
Performance Data Manual (see 3.4)
Mission Crew Manual (see 3.5)
Supplemental Manual (see 3.6)
2. APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
2.1 General. The documents listed in this section are specified in sections 3 and 4 of this
specification. This section does not include documents cited in other sections of this
specification or recommended for additional information or as examples. While every effort
has been made to ensure the completeness of this list, document users are cautioned that
they must meet all specified requirements documents cited in sections 3 and 4 of this
specification, whether or not they are listed.
2.2 Government documents.
2.2.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, standards,

and handbooks form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless
otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those cited in the solicitation or
contract (see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
Military
MIL-PRF-5096 Military Specification, Manuals Technical:

Inspection and Maintenance Requirements;
Acceptance and Functional Check Flight
Procedures and Checklists; Inspection Work
Cards; and Checklists; Preparation of
STANDARDS
Military
MIL-STD-38784 Manuals, Technical - General Style and

Format Requirements
2
Joint Service Specification Guides
JSSG-2001 Air Vehicle
JSSG-2006 Aircraft Structures
JSSG-2010 Crew Systems
HANDBOOKS
Military
MIL-HDBK-1221 Manuals, Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS)
MIL-HDBK-1793 Flight Performance, Air Vehicle
MIL-HDBK-1797 Flying Qualities of Piloted Aircraft
(Copies of the above specifications, standards and handbooks are available from the
Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia,
PA 19111-5094 or www.dsp.dla.mil.)
2.2.2 Other government documents, drawings, and publications. The following other
government documents, drawings, and publications form a part of this document to the
extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues are those cited in the
solicitation (see 6.2).
PUBLICATIONS
Air Force Technical Manuals
TO 1-1B-50 Weight and Balance
Air Force Policy
AFH 11-203 Weather for Aircrews
AFMAN 11-217 Instrument Flying
AFI 11-215 Flight Manual Procedures
AFI 13-203 Air Traffic Control
(Copies of documents required by contractors in connection with specific procurement

functions should be obtained from the acquiring activity or as directed by the contracting
officer.)
3
Government Printing Office Publication 310.1 Quality Assurance Through

(GPO) Attributes Program
(Copies of these documents are available from the Superintendent of Documents, U.S.
Government Printing Office, North Capitol and “H” Streets, NW, Washington, D.C.,
20402 or www.access.gpo.gov.)
2.3 Non-government publications. The following document(s) forms a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of the
documents which are DOD adopted are those listed in the issue of the DODISS cited in the
solicitation. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of documents not listed in the DODISS
are the issues of the documents cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
U.S. Standard Atmosphere, 1976
(Application for copies should be addressed to the Superintendent of Documents, US

Government Printing Office, Washington, D.C. 20402.)
2.4 Order of precedence. In the event of a conflict between the text of this document and
the references cited herein (except for related associated specifications or specification
sheets), the text of this document takes precedence. Nothing in this document, however,
supersedes applicable laws and regulations unless a specific exemption has been obtained.
3. REQUIREMENTS.
3.1 Function of the manuals. The primary function of the manuals is to describe the
aircraft, its equipment, and their operation, characteristics, and restrictions. Sufficient
information shall be included so that a flight crew can operate the aircraft safely and
efficiently. Some systems may require individual normal and emergency procedures,
malfunction analysis, and alternate operations to provide maximum utilization of
malfunctioning equipment. Duties that can be performed by either the pilot or another
crew member shall be assigned to the other crew member to minimize the pilot's duties.
These manuals are not designed to teach basic duties, but how to apply knowledge of basic
duties to the operation of the system. Emphasis shall be placed on any variations to basic
duties that are created by unique characteristics of the system.
3.2 General requirements. Unless otherwise specified, the manner of preparation and
format for all manuals shall be in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-38784,
except as follows:
a. The flight manual (including supplemental and mission crew manual)

shall be arranged by sections and subsections (rather than chapters)
and performance data shall be arranged by parts. All new sections
and new parts shall begin on a right-hand page.
4
b. Critical emergency and minimum reaction items shall be prepared in

10 point, extra bold, uppercase letters.
c. Performance data shall be published as a separate manual, or when

specified by the acquiring activity, as an appendix within the flight
manual (see 6.2).
d. Tables, charts, and graphs shall be considered illustrations and shall

be identified and numbered as figures. Figure numbers in the
performance data shall include the performance data letter and part
number. For example, the first figure in performance data A, part 2
will be numbered Figure A2-1.
e. Paragraph numbering shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-38784,

except that they only go to three indentures.
f. Section and part headings shall be 18-point boldface uppercase.
g. Sideheads shall conform to the following:
(1) Primary sideheads: 14-point, boldface, uppercase letters, with no

text run-in.
(2) First subordinate sideheads: 10-point, boldface, uppercase letters,

with no text run-in.
(3) Second subordinate sideheads: 10-point, boldface, uppercase and

lowercase letters, with no text run-in.
(4) Third subordinate sideheads: 10-point, lightface, uppercase

letters, with no text run-in.
(5) Fourth and all subsequent sideheads: 10-point, lightface

uppercase letters, with the text run-in.
h. Subsection headings shall be 16-point, boldface, uppercase letters. A

subsection is a major subdivision of a section. Subsection titles shall
be centered at the beginning of each subsection. Subsections shall not
be numbered. When subsections are used, there shall be at least two
in a section. Subsections shall be divided into primary and
subordinate sideheads, as required.
i. Page numbers for flight, supplemental, and mission crew manuals
5
shall be as specified in MIL-STD-38784. Page numbers of the

performance data shall include the performance data letter and the
part number. For example: performance data A, part 1, page 1 shall
be numbered A1-1, and performance data B, part 3, page 2 shall be
numbered B3-2.
3.2.1 Warnings, cautions, and notes. The use Warnings, cautions, and notes, shall be in
accordance with MIL-STD-38784, except that warnings and cautions shall follow the
paragraph/procedure. Warnings and cautions used in flight manual checklists shall be held
to an absolute minimum. Unless otherwise specified, only the most critical warnings and
cautions will be included in the checklists. These warnings and cautions shall be approved
by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). Unless otherwise specified, if warnings or cautions
contained in the flight manual are not included in the checklist, the checklist line item shall
be followed by a "W" or a "C" (see 6.2).
3.2.2 Consistency. All material in the flight manual and associated checklists shall be
reviewed for consistency throughout the manual and with any other applicable manuals; for
example, the takeoff technique specified in Section II of the manual shall be based on
takeoff data presented in the performance data. All apparent or actual inconsistencies
shall be corrected or explained.
3.2.2.1 Part nouns. Part nouns shall be specified by the acquiring activity, standardized,
and not necessarily as reflected on the engineering drawings (see 6.2).
3.2.3 Duplication of procedures or techniques. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply,

except as specified herein, for specific emergency and alert requirements.
3.2.4 Use of color. Limited use of color is authorized in the flight manual. It's use shall be
restricted to illustrations where standard black and white print will not effectively convey
or highlight the required information. For illustrations depicting danger zones; the color
red shall be used to identify hazardous areas; the color yellow shall be used to identify
areas of potential hazard and the color green shall be used to identify safe areas. Unless
otherwise specified by the acquiring activity (see 6.2), color shall be used to distinguish flow
patterns on complex hydraulic, fuel, bleed, airflow, and electrical diagrams. Color
illustrations portraying multi-function (glass cockpit) components and other displays such
as color weather radar, shall be representative of the actual display.
3.2.5 References within the manual. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply.

References to figures shall not be used in procedures.
3.2.5.1 References. General temperature references, in air refueling procedures, shall be

given in degrees Celsius in lieu of degrees Fahrenheit. In lieu of requiring the text to refer
to speed and distance readings as calibrated by the equipment, the speed and distance
readings shall designate if the reading is indicated, calibrated, true, etc. Further, the
6
readings shall indicate the units, e.g., nautical miles, feet, seconds, etc.
3.2.6 References to other publications. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply. As a

general rule, reference may be made only to other flight manual publications.
3.2.7 Safety and operational supplements. Formal Safety and Operational Supplements
shall be prepared to the requirements of MIL-STD-38784, except as specified by this
paragraph.
3.2.7.1 Aircrew notices. The following notes shall be included (as specified below) in all
flight manual safety and operational supplements. These notes shall be placed
immediately after the title block and date of the supplement and before the purpose (see
Figure 1).
3.2.7.1.1 Instruction notice. The following notice shall be included on all flight manual
safety and operational supplements.
NOTICE TO AIRCREWS
• Write the number of this supplement alongside the changed portion of the
Flight Manual in pencil.
3.2.7.1.2 Checklist notice. The following notice shall appear on all flight manual safety and
operational supplements affecting checklists.
• This supplement affects your Flight Crew Checklist. Remove the checklist
page(s) from the supplement and insert them in the checklist. Retain
original checklist page(s).
3.2.7.2 Supplement title page changes. In the title block of either the safety or operational
supplement, replace the words "Technical Manual" with the words "Flight Manual".
3.2.7.3 Status page for flight crew manual supplements. The last page of each formal flight
manual safety/operational supplement shall consist of a supplement status page formatted
similar to Figure 2.
3.2.7.4 Abbreviated checklist pages for flight manual supplements. Flight manual
supplements containing information that affects related abbreviated flight crew checklists
shall include temporary checklist pages which reflect the supplemental information. The
checklist pages shall be marked on the affected side, opposite of and in line with the page
number with the identifier OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENT or SAFETY
SUPPLEMENT, as applicable. The flight manual supplement number shall be placed in
parenthesis at the top of the page, opposite of and in line with the technical order (TO)
number. In addition, each affected area or step shall be preceded with the identifying code
7
"(S)". The supplement identifier, supplement number, and identifying codes shall be
presented in uppercase, 10-point, bold type. Refer to Figure 3 for an example abbreviated
checklist supplement page.
3.2.7.4.1 Class 1 supplement pages. Class 1 supplement pages shall be provided as single-
sided, pre-cut or ready-to-cut pages which can easily be inserted into the vinyl sleeve and
over the top of the existing page.
3.2.7.4.2 Class 2 supplement pages. Class 2 supplement pages shall be provided as double-
sided, pre-cut, prepunched ready-to-insert replacement pages. The supplement pages shall
be printed on material of the same color which meets or exceeds the durability standards of
the existing checklist pages.
3.2.8 Changes to the flight manuals. Changes to the flight manuals shall be prepared to
the requirements of MIL-STD-38784, except as specified by this paragraph.
8
FIGURE 1. Example of supplement title page.
9
T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1S-66
STATUS PAGE
This page is published with each formal Safety and Operational
Supplement for Flight Manual Program publications. It contains a
listing of the affected Flight Manual and its related Supplements
and Checklists current on the date of this publication. Changes
or revisions in production are shown in parentheses.
AIRCREW FLIGHT MANUAL BASIC DATE CHANGE NO./ DATE
T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1 1 JUL 82 24 30 NOV 91
FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS BASIC DATE CHANGE NO./ DATE
T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1CL-4 1 JUL 82 22 21 OCT 91

T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1CL-5 1 JUL 82 21 21 OCT 91
T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1CL-6 1 JUL 82 20 30 NOV 91
T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1CL-7 1 JUL 82 22 30 NOV 91
SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL

SUPPLEMENTS DATE SHORT TITLE
1S-63 12 DEC 91 SRCP 1C/2C DELIVERY

1S-64 4 FEB 92 TCTO 547 SUP DATA
1S-65 18 FEB 92 HF 1 RESTRICTION
1S-66 10 APR 92 COMM PROCEDURES
INCORPORATED, RESCINDED, OR DELETED SUPPLEMENTS
1S-38 15 DEC 90 INCORPORATED IN CHG 13

1S-59 1 JAN 91 RESCINDED
FIGURE 2. Example Supplement Status page.
10
(TO 1F-4(R)C-1S-275) TO 1F-4(R)C-1CL-1
TAXIING
1. Wheel Brakes - TEST

2. Nose gear steering - ENGAGE & CHECK
3. (P-WSO) Flight instruments - CHECK OPERATION
4. (P-WSO) Oxygen diluter lever - AS REQUIRED
5. (P) Electronic altimeter - ON, SET CLEARANCE PLANE
6. (WSO) Electronic altimeter - CHECK
(S) 7. (P-WSO) FLR - CHECK
(S) 8. (WSO) FLR mode selector - STBY
9. (P-WSO) RWR/ECM - AS REQUIRED
10. (WSO) Sensor checks - AS REQUIRED
11. (WSO) Window defog - ON
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. (P-WSO) Harness & leads - FASTENED
2. Internal wing transfer switch - NORMAL
3. Tanks 5&6 lockout - AS REQUIRED
4. Stab aug switches - ENGAGE
5. Flight controls - UNRESTRICTED (WSO visually
check control surfaces)
6. Anti-ice switch - AS REQUIRED
7. Stabilizer trim - CHK 1 TO 3 UNITS NOSE DN
8. Fuel quantity - CHECK
9. (P-WSO) Canopies - CLOSE, CHECK
10. Defog-footheat & temp control - AS REQUIRED
11. (WSO) Command selector valve
12. (P-WSO) Lower ejection handle safety guard -
CLEAR
13. Warning lights/voice warning system - CHECK
After runway lineup -
14. External transfer switch - AS DESIRED

15. Flaps - DOWN
16. Anti-skid - ON, LIGHT OUT
OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENT Change 3 2-17
FIGURE 3. Example abbreviated checklist supplement page.
11
3.2.8.1 Status page for change packages. When specified (see 6.2), a status page shall be
provided as part of the change package. This status page shall be similar to the status page
for flight manual supplements (see Figure 2), with the following exceptions.
a. The lead-in statement shall read:
This page is published with each change package for Flight Manual
Program publications. It contains a listing of the affected Flight
Manual and its related Supplements and Checklists current on the
date of this publication. However, formal Safety and Operational
Supplements that are issued after the publication of this change, will
contain a more current version of the status page. Changes or
revisions that are in production are shown in parentheses.
b. The status page for changes shall be located immediately following the final
page of the List of Effective Pages. It shall be numbered with an
alphanumeric number which follows sequentially the last page of the List of
Effective Pages. The page number and change designator shall be located as
specified in MIL-STD-38784.
3.2.9 Extent of coverage. The extent of coverage shall be governed by the criteria specified
in 3.2.9.1 and 3.2.9.2.
3.2.9.1 Complexity. Systems complicated by many controls or several modes of operation

may require more coverage than a system that is simple. This should not be construed to
require extensive coverage of systems that are complex in their configuration but simple in
their operation. If complex equipment or operation concerns only part of the flight crew or
concerns only special personnel, then a mission crew manual shall be prepared, unless
otherwise specified by the acquiring activity (see 6.2).
3.2.9.2 Experience level of intended operating personnel. Coverage shall be governed by the
fact that the manual shall be suitable for use by personnel expected to operate the
equipment. The acquiring activity, in coordination with the using command(s), will
determine the content and the complexity of the coverage of the manuals.
3.2.10 Abbreviations and symbols. Symbols used in this specification are contained in
JSSG 2010.
3.2.11 Paragraph headings.
3.2.11.1 Use of "system" and "general." The word "system" shall be used in paragraph
headings where possible; for example, the required primary heading shall be,
"ELECTRICAL SYSTEM," not "ELECTRICAL CONTROLS," and "FUEL SYSTEM," not
"FUEL SYSTEM CONTROL." (General headings of this type permit the inclusion of
12
information concerning the system in general, its controls, and its indicators under a single
primary paragraph heading.) The subordinate paragraphs shall have headings, such
as,"FUEL SYSTEM CONTROL" and "FUEL SYSTEM INDICATORS." The heading,
"GENERAL", shall not be used unless no suitable substitute can be determined.
3.2.11.2 Selection of headings. Paragraph headings shall be selected to facilitate reference

to the text. The paragraph headings appearing in this specification need not be used in the
manual; for example, the heating, the ventilating, and the pressurization systems will
sometimes be covered under separate headings. In other installations, because of the
complete interdependence of the systems, the heading, "air conditioning system" may be
used more advantageously. Paragraph headings shall not be included simply to show that
the concerned subject matter is not applicable, unless a commonly expected item is omitted
from the aircraft and failure to make reference to that item would be interpreted by the
reader as a publication error. Paragraph headings and explanations shall be included to
indicate that certain portions of the manual will be added as soon as tests have been
completed or that the applicable material may be found in another manual. Each
paragraph shall have a heading or shall be immediately preceded by a paragraph heading.
3.2.12 Procedures. Procedures to accomplish any normal or emergency action that the
flight crew may reasonably be expected to encounter shall be included. Procedures are
those actions by a crew member involving the positioning of controls or the technique of
operating the aircraft and its systems.
3.2.12.1 Presentation of procedures. Procedures shall be presented in checklist form, in

text, or in tabular format, as appropriate. Numbering of primary and subordinate steps
shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-38784.
3.2.12.1.1 Flight manual procedural requirements. Unless otherwise specified by the

acquiring activity (see 6.2), the pilot and copilot procedures shall be combined in a single
column. Where multiple columns are specified, each column shall have a heading in bold
type identifying the crew member. Each item should be stated as briefly as possible with
the subject being first and then the required action; e.g., "Start levers - CUTOFF." If it is
intended that a system be placed in a particular configuration rather than only the control,
reference to the control is omitted; e.g., "landing gear - DOWN", not "landing gear lever -
DOWN". In cases where controls must be positioned but the system is not necessarily
placed in operation, the control name (lever, switch, etc.) shall be included. If a procedure
is affected by conditions existing when the action is performed, the words "AS REQUIRED"
shall be substituted for the usual action; e.g. landing lights - AS REQUIRED. An
explanation covering the different positions in which the controls must be placed in
accordance with existing conditions shall follow this entry unless such information is
obvious. If necessary to designate action by specific crew members, the designations shall
be accomplished by means of capital letters such as:
13
P Pilot DSO Defense System Officer
N Navigator G Gunner
E/FE Engineer/Flight Engineer O Observer
LM Loadmaster RN Radar Navigator
BO Boom Operator CSO Communications Systems Operator
GC Ground Crew S Scanner
OSO Offensive Systems Officer WSO Weapons Systems Officer
3.2.12.1.1.1 The crew designator may follow (preferred method) the action item; or the crew
designator may be placed in front of the procedure. In either case, the location of the crew
designator shall be consistent throughout the manual and shall be approved by the
acquiring activity (see 6.2). If more than one crew designator is listed, the sequence of
listing shall indicate the order of reporting. Procedures that are provided to define aircraft
and system operation techniques are generally presented in paragraph form.
3.2.12.1.1.2 Additional crew designator letters may be used if required and identified by
the acquiring activity (see 6.2).
3.2.12.1.2 Abbreviated checklist requirements. Procedures included in the abbreviated

flight manual checklists shall be obtained directly from the flight manual. Checklist
procedures may include amplifications, but shall be kept to a minimum. The inclusion of
warnings and cautions shall be as specified in paragraph 3.2.1.
3.2.12.2 Procedure amplifications. Amplifications of actions shall be accomplished by

either an explanatory sentence following the item or by substeps (1), (2), (3), etc. Examples
are:
a. Gear - UP
Check that the landing gear position indicators display the word UP, and
that the landing gear handle warning light is out.
b. Flight recorder - Check, then OFF
(1) Flight recorder switch ON, observe OFF light goes out.
(2) Insert headset plug at monitor panel to check time remaining.
(3) Flight recorder switch OFF, observe OFF light illuminates.
14
3.2.12.3 Coordinated action. If a procedure requires simultaneous or coordinated actions,

the actions shall be arranged in parallel columns, chronologically, and numbered in the
proper sequence. No attempt need be made to have like numbers opposite one another in
the columns. If it is necessary to show that the action in one column must be delayed until
a series of actions in another column have been completed, the former column shall be left
blank until the required point opposite the latter column is reached. Coordinated
procedures or techniques for which a checklist is not applicable (such as starting engines or
takeoff) shall be provided in a tabular figure. This table shall have two or more columns
(one for each crew member) and the actions shall be arranged in chronological order as in a
coordinated checklist. Actions in the tabular format shall be written in sentence form
without numbered steps. In a checklist, if coordination is required between the pilot and
some other crew member, a circle shall be placed around the step number to identify the
required coordination. If the action taken is to be reported to the person reading the
checklist, the action shall begin quotation marks. Action that is not in quotation marks
indicates that the crew member completes the action and remains silent.
3.2.12.4 Lengthy procedures. Where a phase of operation or a lengthy procedure spans

several pages, consideration shall be given to a breakdown into subsections. Titles of
continued procedures shall be duplicated on succeeding pages (e.g., INTERIOR
INSPECTION - Continued).
3.2.12.5 Codes for types of operation. Codes identifying a type of operation, where
procedures differ from the normal, shall precede the numbered item. If only one such
operation is being covered, it may be desirable to use an asterisk (*) or other symbol. Such
a symbol shall not be used elsewhere in the procedures to indicate another meaning. The
use of (S) is reserved exclusively to identify areas within abbreviated checklists which were
affected by current flight manual supplements (see 3.2.7.4).
3.2.12.6 Procedures for checklist. Procedures contained in sections, other than the Normal
Procedures, Emergency Procedures, Mission Crew Duties and Procedures Sections, shall be
incorporated into checklists, when applicable. When this is required, the procedural item
shall refer to the procedure location within the flight manual, for example, "3. Oxygen -
checked (refer to oxygen system Section I)."
3.2.12.7 High risk areas. All high risk situations, maneuvers, and procedures shall be
emphasized throughout the manual. The appropriate response(s) in high risk conditions
shall be stated.
3.2.13 Systems, controls, and indicators. Each major system installed on the aircraft shall
be covered under a major heading. The name of the system shall be used as the primary
paragraph heading and the name of each component, control, or indicator as the
subordinate heading. Sufficient views to illustrate all instruments and controls in all
operating crew member compartments shall be included. The requirements of this
paragraph apply whenever there is a need to present system operation information. The
15
description of the systems shall be covered as follows:
a. An introductory paragraph shall cover the basic concept, function, and

integration of the system. Specific controls may be mentioned. However, a
detailed discussion of the system shall be avoided in order to maintain the
general nature of the introductory paragraph. Information such as automatic
features and sources of power may be included in the introductory paragraph.
This information shall be fully described in the detailed description. A
reference shall be made to the servicing diagram for fluid specifications (see
3.3.3.42).
b. A detailed description on the operation of each system installed on the

aircraft shall be provided. Normal and alternate procedures shall be
provided. Information on the peculiarities and automatic features of the
system shall be included. Information shall be given regarding items such as
source of power to operate the system (mechanically, electrically, or
hydraulically operated) and means by which the system accomplishes its
functions. The internal mechanics of the system shall be described only
insofar as necessary to make comprehension of the system complete. The
integration of the system with other aircraft systems shall be fully described,
including the effects that each system could have on the other.
c. Each control, contributing to the operation of the system, shall be described,

and its location established. The description shall include the function of the
control and the operation of each control setting. A detailed description on
how activation of the control accomplishes the end result shall be stated
(mechanically, electrically, or hydraulically). An example is, "The landing
gear lever mechanically releases the uplocks and electrically positions the
hydraulic selector valve." (not, "The landing gear lever operates the landing
gear."). Descriptions of controls used in the normal operation of a system
shall be listed first, followed by descriptions of those controls used as backups
to the normal controls. The description of the controls and the indicators for
a complex system may be included in chart or tabular form for purposes of
clarity.
d. All indicators, instruments, and warning devices which are part of the system
shall be fully described as outlined below:
(1) The location of the indicator, instrument, or warning device.
(2) If not included in the detailed system description, include the function.
(3) Power and input data sources for the instrument/instrument displays.
Effects of sensor limitations on the displays.
16
(4) Erroneous indications leading to unsafe operations.
(5) Alternate input data sources for instruments, including degradation of

indications that may result from use of alternate data.
(6) If an indicator is very closely related to a single control, the indicator

may be described in the paragraph covering the control.
3.2.14 Illustrations. A general arrangement diagram (see 3.2.14.5), and an adequate

number of illustrations to show the controls operable by the flight crew shall be included.
Cockpit and compartment views shall be included, to fully illustrate the areas that are used
by flight personnel. Illustrations shall be added to the manual as necessary to simplify the
comprehension of equipment and procedures. Illustrations shall be located with their
related text.
3.2.14.1 Types of illustrations. The use of illustrations shall be based on clarity and
economy of presentation, performance of function, and factual representation.
3.2.14.2 Callouts. Callouts on illustrations shall begin with the number 1 at the top left-
hand corner and shall be arranged numerically in clockwise order. If a clockwise
arrangement is not practical, the callouts shall be arranged in lines reading from left to
right or top to bottom. Keys and callouts are not required for illustrations on which the
names of the controls are legible on the printed page. Where the illustration will not suffer
from overcrowding, nomenclature callouts may be used in place of numerical callouts and
figure keys.
3.2.14.3 Panels and consoles. Repetitive views of panels and consoles to illustrate
differences between groups of aircraft shall be avoided. Panels that are not identical in all
the aircraft of a given series shall be labeled "typical" and no attempt shall be made to show
minor variations in arrangement. Variations in the addition and deletion of controls and
instruments shall be indicated by inserts and by notations in the figure key. The panels or
consoles may be illustrated more than once if major changes in configuration are involved.
3.2.14.4 Schematic (flow) diagrams. Schematic diagrams, prepared in accordance with

MIL-STD-38784, shall be used as necessary to show the "flow" of systems such as the
hydraulic, fuel, electrical, and bleed systems. A drawing shall be included to provide the
reader with a mental picture of the equipment and it's location, while the schematic
diagram is studied in detail. The drawing shall be presented on a separate page preceding
the schematic diagram unless space permits location on the same page. The schematic
diagram shall illustrate the operation of the system in a manner as straightforward as
possible. To accomplish this, the components of the schematic diagrams shall be presented
in the following order of importance:
a. The flow of the system shall receive primary importance by having a
17
minimum of turns in the lines. It shall be presented so that it can be read

from left to right and top to bottom. The flow shall include such items as
generators, tanks, and reservoirs, which are considered to be the starting
point of most schematic diagrams. The diagram shall be arranged so that the
flow of the system can be traced with minimum of effort. Crossovers shall be
avoided or eliminated where possible. Return lines need not be shown in
their entirety unless required to enhance the understanding of the system.
To avoid any suggestion of electrical wiring diagrams, all electrical flow lines
on electrical schematic diagrams shall be represented by wide bands as
opposed to thin lines. This requirement shall not be construed to include
electrical actuation lines which shall be represented by thin black lines.
b. A separate pattern shall be used for each individual system on any one
illustration that will distinguish between the supply, pressure, and return
systems. The same coding for each individual system shall be used
throughout the manual.
c. Controls and indicators used by flight crews shall be second in importance

only to the flow of the system. They shall be made to stand out by being
presented in their actual shape as well as being emphasized by means of
shading. Controls and indicators shall be set off slightly to the side. Controls
on electrical diagrams may be placed directly on the flow lines.
d. All flow control devices within the system, such as check valves, fuel pumps,
accumulators, and relays shall be identified. Solenoid valves shall be
indicated as such and shall include a notation indicating whether the valve is
spring loaded to the open or closed position. Once a symbol or device is
established for a valve or control, it shall be used for this type valve
throughout the manual. Where diagrams are complex by virtue of the
equipment's automatic features or interrelated controls, such characteristics
shall be covered by means of explanatory text in the diagram instead of by
schematic representation. On schematic diagrams such as electrical, where a
large number of items are listed, the items shall be presented in alphabetical
order.
3.2.14.5 General arrangement diagrams. Each manual shall contain a diagram entitled
"general arrangement diagram." This diagram shall illustrate the arrangement of the
aircraft, including items such as external power receptacles, batteries, water containers,
auxiliary power unit (APU), entrance doors, hatches, engine cover and tool kits, and other
loose equipment. These diagrams shall not include individual controls, aircraft systems, or
emergency equipment. The general arrangement diagram shall consist of one or more
diagrams as necessary to accomplish their function. The remaining information that must
be covered may either be included in this diagram or segregated into one or more separate
illustrations as indicated herein for the crew movement diagram and compartment
18
diagram. If desirable, two or more of these illustrations may be combined into one diagram
"Crew Movement and Compartment." The following requirements shall be applicable to
these diagrams.
a. The crew movement diagram shall illustrate the various routes available to
the crew to move about the aircraft.
b. The compartment diagram shall illustrate and identify each compartment

that can carry cargo or that can be entered by flight personnel. It shall
identify each crew member, normal location, and depict dimensions of usable
space of each compartment. The length shall be depicted by the portrayal of
fuselage station numbers by compartment.
3.2.14.6 Exterior of aircraft. Views of the exterior of the aircraft shall not contain
squadron or any other identifying insignia.
3.2.14.7 Foldouts. Foldout pages shall not be required in the air refueling section.
3.2.15 Nomenclature. The name used for an item of equipment shall be consistent
throughout the manual. The name may be shortened provided the identity of the
equipment is not confused.
3.2.15.1 Nomenclature for equipment, controls, and indicators. All equipment, controls,
and indicators shall be identified by titles that are descriptive of their configuration and
function, and shall be compatible with their placarded or decaled nomenclature, if possible.
Titles shall be kept as short as possible, but provide adequate differentiation between
similar items. Examples are:
a. Use "fuel selector handle," not "fuel selector control," and "flap lever," not
"flap control."
b. If there is a switch with a decaled nomenclature of "EMER GEN," use

"emergency generator switch." No attempt should be made to refer to this
control as the "EMER GEN switch" simply to duplicate its exact decaled
nomenclature.
c. If two systems (e.g., hydraulic and fuel) each have an isolation valve switch,
then each shall be further identified as "hydraulic isolation valve switch" and
"fuel isolation valve switch."
3.2.15.2 Nomenclature for control positions. Reference to a labeled control position shall be
shown in uppercase letters; quotation marks shall not be used for this purpose. Where
applicable, duplicate the exact labeled position (e.g., "Armament selector knob - STBY").
Reference to an implied position shall be indicated by capitalizing the first letter, with
19
remaining letters in lower-case (e.g., "Flaps circuit breaker - pull").
3.2.15.3 Standard terminology. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply. Terminology

shall be consistent with the intended operator's standard usage. Where applicable, the
following standard terminology shall apply:
a. References to a crew member shall be made by position occupied and not by

qualification.
b. Cockpits in tandem seat aircraft shall be labeled "front" and "rear."
3.2.16 Quoting of numerical values. To the extent possible, a single appropriate location
shall be used for quoting any numerical value or values so that if the value is changed, only
one place in the manual will require changing. For example, system capacities should be
discussed under the system description but limiting values such as maximum or minimum
pressures would be covered in Section V. References shall be made to the place containing
the information. In the case of operating procedures in Section II, for example, "...advance
the throttle to max power" rather than to repeat the value shown in Section V for maximum
power.
3.2.17 Operating limitations and restrictions. All operating limitations and restrictions
shall be thoroughly covered (see 3.3.7). An explanation for the limitation or restriction
shall be included when further clarification is needed. Limitations of a numerical value
shall be rounded to the nearest readable figure consistent with the component or system
concerned, not to exceed maximum system limits.
3.2.18 Instrument accuracy. Acceptable tolerances and fluctuations of instruments shall

be stated if they are significant to the operation of the aircraft. Limitations which cannot
be detected by the crew member shall not be imposed.
3.2.19 Multipurpose controls. Controls that are used to operate more than one system,
such as a fuel and oil shutoff switch or a bomb-rocket-drop tank release button, shall be
mentioned in connection with each system concerned. Detailed coverage regarding the
control shall be included under the primary system. Reference shall be made to the other
system description as necessary.
3.2.20 Equipment location. Familiar objects shall be utilized in locating equipment.

Stations or bulkhead numbers are acceptable only when they are identifiable to the flight
crew. If two or more compartments exist, each shall be identified.
3.2.21 Aircraft designation. Reference to the aircraft by model or series designation shall
be avoided throughout the manual; for example, the reference shall be "The aircraft is
equipped with ..." not "The F-22A is equipped with ..." Reference to a specific model or
series, as necessary, is permissible in a manual containing several models or series.
20
3.2.22 Airspeeds. All airspeeds for takeoff, climbout (obstacle clearance), approach,
landing, stall speed, and associated charts shall be presented in the airspeed format needed
by the primary crew member using the information. The flight crew shall not be required
to convert airspeeds while utilizing procedural data or the associated charts.
3.2.23 Identification of various groups of aircraft. Effectivities or distinctions between

groups of aircraft shall be made only when such information is of definite value to the flight
crew in the operation of the aircraft. The two methods normally used to quote effectivities
or distinctions between various groups of aircraft are: (1) noting the applicable serial/block
number range, or (2) by means of a coding system. Wherever practical, visual cues should
be used for differentiation; e.g., if some aircraft are equipped with a tail hook system and
the detailed effectivity has been previously defined, then a procedural line item may be
"Tail hook - DOWN (SOME AIRCRAFT)" or "Tail hook - DOWN (If Installed)." If a coding
system is utilized, the following shall apply:
a. Paragraphs that do not cover all the aircraft listed on the title page shall be
identified by a selected code. The code shall appear at the top left-hand
corner and prior to each paragraph heading or procedural step to which the
code applies. This requirement means that every paragraph requiring an
identification code shall have one properly placed, even if there are several
paragraphs applicable to the same version presented in succession.
b. Paragraphs that are applicable to all series of the aircraft shall not carry a
notation.
c. Notes, cautions, and warnings shall be treated as individual paragraphs for

coding purposes.
3.2.24 Aircraft affected by modification. Coverage for aircraft affected, either in production
or by modification, shall be identified. Areas identified should be arranged so that, when
all aircraft are modified, nonapplicable material can be removed without an entire rewrite
of the area.
3.2.25 Security classification. Unless otherwise specified, the flight manual and associated
checklists shall be unclassified (see 6.2). If classified data is required, the data shall be
placed in a separate supplemental manual (see 3.6). Classified data shall be marked to the
requirements of MIL-STD-38784.
3.3 Flight manual. Unless otherwise specified, the flight manual shall consist of eight
sections. When specified, the associated performance data shall be provided as an appendix
within the flight manual (see 3.4). The acquiring activity shall specify the types of manuals
and abbreviated checklists to be procured (see 6.2). All sections shall begin on a right-hand
page starting with an introduction paragraph. The arrangement of each section shall be as
specified herein and shall be changed only with the approval of the acquiring activity (see
21
6.2). If sections are added, the additional sections shall follow Section VIII and shall be
numbered consecutively starting with IX. Titles for the additional sections must be
approved by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). If a given section is not required, a stand-alone
section title page shall be provided (on a right-hand page) along with a notation stating the
section does not apply. If the section has been replaced by a supplemental manual (i.e. a
mission crew manual), the section title page shall provide a reference to the related manual
by TO number and title. The following section shall begin on the next right-hand page.
The arrangement of the flight manual shall be as follows:
a. Front matter - (see 3.3.2)
b. Section I - Description and Operation (see 3.3.3).
c. Section II - Normal Procedures (see 3.3.4).
d. Section III - Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5).
e. Section IV - Mission Crew Duties and Procedures (see 3.3.6).
f. Section V - Operating Limitations (see 3.3.7).
g. Section VI - Flight Characteristics (see 3.3.8).
h. Section VII - Adverse Weather Operation (see 3.3.9).
i. Section VIII - Air Refueling Procedures (see 3.3.10 and 6.2)
j. Additional Sections as approved by acquiring activity.
k. Performance Data (when specified) (see 6.2).
l. Glossary.
m. Alphabetical Index.
3.3.1 Trainer version aircraft. When applicable, a discussion shall be included to describe
the essential differences between the basic aircraft and its trainer version. The discussion
shall be limited to those differences affecting flight crew operation of the aircraft and
performance variations. This data may be included in the main differences table (see
3.3.3.1.4). Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity this data may be included in
accordance with j or within Sections I through VIII and the performance data (see 6.2).
3.3.2 Front matter. The general manner of preparation of front matter for the flight
manual, performance data manual, supplemental manual, and the abbreviated flight
22
manual checklist shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-38784 except as specified below.
a. Title page (see 3.3.2.1).
b. List of Effective Pages (see 3.3..2.2).
c. Verification Status Page (see 3.3.2.3).
d. Table of Contents (see 3.3.2.4).
e. List of Illustrations (see 3.3.2.5).
f. Foreword/Preface/Introduction (see 3.3.2.6).
3.3.2.1 Title pages. Title pages for flight manuals, performance data manuals, and
supplemental flight manuals shall be in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-
38784, with the exception of the following special requirements.
a. For flight manuals: The words "TECHNICAL MANUAL" shall be replaced by

FLIGHT MANUAL.
b. For performance data manuals: The words "TECHNICAL MANUAL" shall

be replaced by:
FLIGHT MANUAL
APPENDIX 1
PERFORMANCE DATA
c. For supplemental manuals: The words "TECHNICAL MANUAL" shall be

replaced by:
SUPPLEMENTAL
FLIGHT MANUAL
3.3.2.1.1 Supersedure notice. The supersedure notice for a change or revision shall be
placed on the title page in accordance with MIL-STD-38784. It shall include a list of all
currently incorporated operational and safety supplements as well as a reference to the
appropriate technical order index for the current status of flight crew flight manuals,
operational and safety supplements, and checklists. When no operational or safety
supplements are replaced, the notice shall read: "REFER TO TECHNICAL ORDER INDEX
TO (applicable TO number) FOR CURRENT STATUS OF FLIGHT MANUALS,
SUPPLEMENTS AND CHECKLISTS."
3.3.2.1.2 Supplemental manual reference. When a separate supplemental manual

(performance data, classified, etc.) has been developed (see 3.6), a reference that the flight
manual is incomplete without the supplemental manual shall be included on the title page.
23
A similar reference to the flight manual shall be included on the title page of the
supplemental manual. These references shall remain on the title pages as long as the
supplemental manual exists.
3.3.2.1.3 Emergency procedure notice. One or both of the following statements shall
appear on the title page of classified flight manuals, including changes, revisions, and
applicable supplements. The acquiring activity will select the appropriate statement(s) (see
6.2).
"When Section III, Emergency Procedures, is withdrawn from this manual for use in
control towers, and if there is no classified information in Section III, the security
classification of Section III shall be cancelled."
"Radio transmission in the clear of pertinent emergency operating instructions

contained herein is authorized under emergency conditions in accordance with AFI
13-203."
3.3.2.2 List of effective pages. A list of effective pages shall be prepared in accordance with
MIL-STD-38784. A list of the current abbreviated flight crew checklists shall be provided
at the end of the List of Effective Pages. This list shall include the basic or revision date,
change number and date, and checklist title. This list shall be entitled "CURRENT
FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS." When the option for Status Page for Changes (see 3.2.8.1)
has been exercised, the list of Current Flight Crew Checklists shall be omitted from the List
of Effective Pages on other than the basic issue or revision edition of the manual.
3.3.2.3 Verification status page. All flight manuals and associated checklists containing
unverified procedures shall have a verification status page prepared in accordance with
MIL-STD-38784.
3.3.2.4 Tables of contents. Each manual shall have a table of contents as specified in
3.3.2.4.1. A table of contents shall be included at the beginning of each section, at the
beginning of the performance data, and at the beginning of each part of the performance
data. Closely related primary paragraphs grouped on one or two pages shall not be listed
individually in the tables of contents but shall be listed as a single entry designating the
general subject matter. When a classified supplement is involved, the same principles
established for the main table of contents shall be followed (see MIL-STD-38784).
3.3.2.4.1 Main table of contents. The main table of contents shall consist of the section
headings, section numbers, and the number of the first page of each section. If a classified
supplement is involved, the following principles shall apply to the basic flight manual: the
complete table of contents shall be included; if any (unclassified) portion of an affected
section appears in the basic manual, the table of contents entry shall be included; if no
portion of an affected section appears in the basic manual, the table of contents shall refer
only to the publication number of the classified supplement. The table of contents shall not
24
refer to the fact that only a portion of a given section is included.
3.3.2.5 List of illustrations. A list of illustrations shall be prepared in accordance with

MIL-STD-38784.
3.3.2.6 Foreword/Preface/Introduction. The introduction shall contain the scope of the

manual and any other pertinent data. The page shall be identified by one of the following
terms "FOREWORD," "PREFACE," or "INTRODUCTION." The introduction shall include
the definitions of notes, cautions, and warnings and the usage of the words "shall," "will,"
"should," and "may," as defined in MIL-STD-38784. The information contained in the
checklist or supplemental manual introduction shall not duplicate information in the flight
manual introduction. The introduction shall also include the following information altered
to fit the specific flight manual:
SCOPE.
This manual contains information which will provide you with a general knowledge
of the aircraft, and its characteristics and specific normal and emergency operating
procedures. Your flying experience is recognized; therefore, basic flight principles
are avoided. This manual provides you with operating instructions useable under
most conditions. This does not alleviate the need for sound judgement in your
operation of the aircraft. Multiple emergencies, adverse weather, terrain, etc., may
require modification of the procedure(s) presented in this manual.
PERMISSIBLE OPERATIONS.
The flight manual takes a "positive approach" and normally states only what you
can do. Unusual operations or configurations are prohibited unless specifically
covered herein. Clearance from higher headquarters must be obtained before any
questionable operation, which is not specifically permitted in this manual, is
attempted.
HOW TO BE ASSURED OF HAVING LATEST DATA.
Refer to the AF TO Catalog web page https://www.toindex-s.wpafb.af.mil

for a listing of all current flight manuals, safety supplements, operational
supplements, and checklists. Also, check the flight manual title page, the title block
of each safety and operational supplement, and the latest status page contained in
the manual, or the latest safety or operational supplement. Clear up all
discrepancies before flight.
ARRANGEMENT.
The manual is divided into eight independent sections to simplify reading it straight
25
through or for using it as a reference manual. The aircraft performance data is

located (the contractor shall insert either the appendix or TO number).
SAFETY SUPPLEMENTS.
Information involving safety will be promptly forwarded to you in a safety

supplement. Urgent information is published in interim safety supplements and
transmitted electronically. Formal supplements are mailed. The supplement title
block and status page should be checked to determine the supplement's effect on the
manual and other outstanding supplements.
OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENTS.
Information involving changes to operating procedures will be forwarded to you by

operational supplements. The procedure for handling operational supplements is
the same as for safety supplements.
CHECKLISTS.
The flight manual contains itemized procedures with necessary amplifications. The
checklist contains itemized procedures. Amplifications may be included, but shall be
kept to a minimum. Primary line items in the flight manual and checklist are
identical. If a formal safety or operational supplement affects your checklist, the
affected checklist page will be attached to the supplement.
HOW TO GET INDIVIDUALLY ASSIGNED COPIES.
Each flight crew member is entitled to receive individually assigned copies of the
flight manual, safety supplements, operational supplements, and checklists. The
required quantities should be ordered before you need them to assure their prompt
receipt. Check with your publication distribution officer - it is their job to fulfill your
TO requests. TO 00-5-1 and 00-5-2 give detailed information for properly ordering
these publications.
FLIGHT MANUAL BINDERS.
Loose leaf binders and sectionalized tabs are available for use with your manual and
checklists. They are obtained through local purchase procedures and are listed in
the General Services Administration (GSA) Supply Catalog (FSN 7510, Office
Products). Check with your supply personnel for assistance in acquiring these
items.
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES.
26
The following definitions apply in "Warnings," "Cautions," and "Notes" found

throughout the manual.
WARNING
Operating procedures, techniques, etc., which could result in personal injury

and/or loss of life if not carefully followed.
CAUTION
Operating procedures, techniques, etc., which could result in damage to

equipment if not carefully followed.
NOTE
An operating procedure, technique, etc., which is considered essential to

emphasize.
YOUR RESPONSIBILITY - TO LET US KNOW.
Every effort is made to keep the flight manual current. Review conferences with
operating personnel, and a constant review of accident and flight test reports, assure
inclusion of the latest data in the manual. We cannot correct an error unless we
know of its existence. In this regard, it is essential that you do your part.
Comments, corrections, and questions regarding this manual, or any phase of the
flight manual program, are welcome. These should be forwarded on AF Form 847 as
directed by AFI 11-215 through your command headquarters.
3.3.2.6.1 List of time compliance technical orders (TCTOs). A list of TCTOs (aircraft
modifications) shall be included as a part of the Foreword/Preface/Introduction. The list
shall be prepared in accordance with MIL-STD-38784 but shall be limited to those aircraft
changes that are meaningful to the flight crew (see 6.13). The acquiring activity and the
contractor should agree to use a common information service to determine when the entire
fleet has been modified or the TCTO has been rescinded (see 6.2).
3.3.3 Section I - Description and operation. This section of the manual shall describe the
aircraft, its controls, and installed equipment. It may be desirable to combine some
subjects or to arrange them so that systems of a particular type are together; e.g., all
hydraulically powered systems. In some manuals it may be desirable to arrange the
subjects alphabetically. Section I shall include normal operation of systems and equipment
and, if applicable, malfunction analysis information and alternate operation. These data
may be presented in itemized procedural form and may be included in the flight crew
checklist. Theory of operation may be included to adequately cover complex systems. Any
27
features that are applicable to a specific aircraft, but are not specified herein, shall be
included, unless waived by the acquiring activity. The order of subjects and content will be
determined by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). Where appropriate, references shall be made
to Section V for system/subsystem operating limitations and capabilities.
3.3.3.1 Aircraft general. This paragraph shall provide the aircrew with general aircraft
information including general weight class, design, primary and alternate missions, and
general operational characteristics. For aircraft with multiple crew members, this portion
of the manual shall also define various crew requirements for the aircraft. These
requirements shall be based on the following criteria:
a. A normal crew complement consists of the crew members required to

accomplish the assigned mission.
b. A mission crew is the complement required to accomplish the aircraft's

designed mission.
c. A minimum flight crew consists of the absolute minimum number of crew

members required to takeoff, fly, and land the aircraft safely.
d. An emergency crew is the absolute minimum crew required to takeoff, fly,

and land the aircraft where risk is involved and loss of the aircraft is likely.
3.3.3.1.1 Aircraft dimensions. The overall dimensions of the aircraft shall be discussed and
illustrated. The reader shall be referred to Section II for turning radius and ground
clearances.
3.3.3.1.2 Aircraft gross weight. The approximate gross weight of the aircraft in various
configurations shall be listed. It shall be clearly stated that these weights shall not be used
for operation or computing aircraft performance. Reference shall be made to the -5 series
technical order for detailed weight and balance information.
3.3.3.1.3 Interior arrangement. A general description of the interior arrangement of the

aircraft, including typical diagrams of the general arrangement, crew movement, and
compartments shall be provided (see 3.2.14.5).
3.3.3.1.4 Main differences table. The main differences table shall indicate the main
differences in design and operation between each aircraft series covered in the manual and
other closely related series of the same model. Special emphasis shall be placed on new
features which will affect recognition and operation. This table shall be brief, and located
as near the beginning of the section as possible.
3.3.3.2 Engine. A general description of the engine and all its related controls, including
special features of the engine, shall be provided. For the purpose of the manual, the
28
description of engine feeder systems, such as fuel and oil supply systems, shall end where
the systems deliver their product to an engine driven device (i.e., the oil pump). The
description shall include the model designations of all engines used on the aircraft.
3.3.3.2.1 Engine thrust. A general description of the development of thrust or horsepower

shall be provided. Where applicable, the description shall include the range of climatic
conditions where maximum power can be obtained. Reference shall be made to the
performance data (see 3.4.10.2).
3.3.3.2.2 Engine oil system. Data on all controls affecting the oil system shall be included.
Engine oil pressure and temperature gauges shall be covered under engine instruments
(see 3.3.3.2.6). A schematic of the engine oil system shall be provided.
3.3.3.2.4 Engine fuel control system. This system applies to all engines equipped with a
fuel controlling device (a jet engine uses a fuel control; a reciprocating engine uses a
carburetor or fuel injection device). When applicable, special emphasis shall be placed on
the emergency systems. Any systems affected by throttle operation such as afterburner or
water injection, system components such as fuel pumps and heaters shall be described.
Coverage of carburetors or injection devices shall include items such as mixture, carburetor
heat, and air filter. Schematics of the engine fuel control shall be provided.
3.3.3.2.4 Starting and priming system. These systems and associated controls shall be
described. The point at which priming fuel is injected shall be stated.
3.3.3.2.5 Associated engine systems. Descriptions shall be provided for the following
associated engine systems as applicable.
a. Compressor surge bleed system.
b. Afterburner.
c. Supercharger.
d. Water injection system including quantity, duration of supply, use, and

controls.
e. Intake and exhaust area including the controls and indicators used in
varying the intake and exhaust area, and any unusual features or
characteristics of the system.
f. All equipment and controls provided for cooling of the engines.
g. The ignition system and its controls.
29
h. Engine thrust reverser system operation.
i. Throttle system and all systems affected by throttle operation, such as water
injection and propeller reversing.
j. Transmission system (the system utilized to transmit power from the engine
to the propeller or rotor). A system schematic shall be provided.
k. Propeller or rotor and the system for controlling, feathering, or disengaging.
l. Type of assist takeoff units that are to be employed, where and how they are
installed, and any special precautions regarding their use.
3.3.3.2.6 Engine instruments. All instruments that indicate engine condition or operation
shall be described (see 3.2.13d and 3.3.3.2).
3.3.3.2.7 Engine operation. Each phase of engine operation from engine start to engine
shutdown shall be described.
3.3.3.3 Engine overheat and fire detection system. These systems shall be described.
3.3.3.4 Engine fire extinguisher system. This system shall be described. Descriptions of
equipment with dangerous agents shall include a warning spelling out the dangers, and
precautions to follow when using the equipment.
3.3.3.5 Auxiliary power unit(s) (APU). The APU system, compressor assembly, power
turbine assembly, accessory assembly, oil system, fuel system, starting system, special
control, fire detection and warning system, and fire extinguisher system shall be described.
3.3.3.6 Air turbine motor/ram air turbine. The air turbine motor/ram air turbine operation
and cooling shall be described. Descriptions of all components shall be included.
3.3.3.7 Oil supply system. Components of this system, such as tanks, pump, and cooler
shall be described. Unless otherwise specified, a schematic diagram of the oil supply
system shall be included. A reference shall be made to the servicing diagram (see 3.3.3.42)
on oil grade and specification requirements.
3.3.3.8 Fuel supply system. The fuel supply system shall be fully described. Descriptions
shall be provided for the following as applicable:
a. Fuel tanks.
b. Tank venting.
30
c. Drop tank release controls.
d. Boost pumps.
e. Gravity pumps.
f. Jettisoning.
g. Single-point ground refueling system.
h. Any requirements for special fuels, what the fuel is used for, and what tanks
are to be used in servicing.
i. Air refueling system (with appropriate references to Section VIII and air
refueling operating procedures).
NOTE: A statement shall be made that approved fuel grades and applicable specifications
are covered in the servicing diagram (see 3.3.3.42).
3.3.3.8.1 Fuel quantity data table. Fuel quantity data shall be given in tabular form. The
names of the tanks appearing in the first column shall be identical to the name appearing
on the tank selector; a more explanatory title may be carried in parentheses, if desired.
The table shall include data on each tank (including dropable and ferry) that is designed for
use with the aircraft. Care shall be exercised not to inadvertently quote tank volume as
"usable fuel" or "fully serviced". Typical fuel configurations showing the total usable fuel in
each case shall be included as a part of this table. For aircraft equipped with fuel quantity
gauges reading in pounds, figures denoting pounds shall be followed by the conversion to
gallons. A note shall be included indicating that gallon weights are based on a given
density in pounds-per-gallon at standard-day temperature.
3.3.3.9 Electrical power supply system. Alternating current (ac), direct current (dc), and
emergency or hot bus supply on complex aircraft, including components such as generators,
alternators, and batteries shall be described. The relation of APU and external power
source to the electrical system shall be covered. Schematics shall be included according to
3.3.3.9.1.
3.3.3.9.1 Electrical system schematic diagram. A schematic diagram shall be provided

showing items such as sources of power, controls, bus arrangement, and circuits connected
to each bus. Unless otherwise specified, separate schematics shall be provided for ac and dc
systems (see 3.3.3.9, 3.2.14.4, and 6.2).
3.3.3.9.2 Circuit breakers and fuses. The location and function of all circuit breakers and
fuses under the control of the crew member shall be described. Primary emphasis shall be
placed on describing the function and general location in conjunction with the system with
31
which it is associated. All major circuit breaker and/or fuse panels shall be displayed with
the label of each clearly visible and its location in the aircraft identified (see 3.3.3.9.2.1).
3.3.3.9.2.1 Circuit breaker and junction box diagram. The location of each circuit breaker
accessible to and used by the flight crew shall be shown. Each circuit breaker in the panels
shall be identified. The location of each junction box containing circuit breakers or fuses
shall be included. A circuit breaker index shall be provided for aircraft that have a large
number of circuit breakers. The circuit breaker index shall list the aircraft systems
alphabetically and list the components alphabetically under each system. The circuit
breaker decal name and its location shall be listed next to each component (see 3.3.3.9.2).
3.3.3.10 Hydraulic power supply system. The primary and emergency systems and their
related controls shall be described. Data on hydraulic pumps, suction boost pumps,
reservoirs, and power transfer units shall be included. A schematic of each hydraulic power
supply system shall be provided. A list of systems operated by each hydraulic power supply
system shall be included.
3.3.3.11 Pneumatic power supply system. This system shall be described in the same
manner specified for the hydraulic power supply system.
3.3.3.12 Bleed air supply system. The engine and APU bleed air supply systems shall be
described. A schematic diagram of the system and a list of systems supplied with the bleed
air shall be included. The bleed air duct overheat detection system shall also be described.
3.3.3.13 Landing gear system. This system, including information covering gear extension
and retraction, position of gear doors when gear is extended, extension and retraction
times, shall be described. A schematic of the landing gear system shall be provided.
Complex and unique gear systems (i.e., ski systems) shall be discussed separately.
Emergency gear operations shall be discussed.
3.3.3.14 Ground steering system. Items such as nose gear steering system, main gear
steering, emergency steering, and crosswind positioning shall be described.
3.3.3.15 Brake system. The brake system, including the anti-skid system, shall be
described.
3.3.3.16 Drag chutes and arresting equipment. Applicable types of aerodynamic drag
devices and arresting hooks shall be described.
3.3.3.17 Wing flaps, slat system, and boundary layer control. All flaps, slats, boundary
layer control, or other lift devices shall be described. Extension and retraction times shall
be included.
3.3.3.18 Wing sweep system. This system shall be described. Precautions to be observed
32
during operation and flight shall be included. The sweep settings which lead to optimum
flight for various conditions such as takeoff, landing, and supersonic flight shall be listed.
3.3.3.19 Wing fold systems. This system shall be described. Precautions to be observed to
ensure that wings are locked in the spread condition shall be included.
3.3.3.20 Speed brake system and spoiler system. All systems used for aerodynamic
braking shall be described.
3.3.3.21 Stall limiter system. This system and associated equipment such as computers,
angle Of attack (AOA) indicators, and warning devices shall be described.
3.3.3.22 Flight control systems. Primary and secondary flight controls, trim devices,
locking devices, and control column shall be described. A schematic of the flight control
systems shall be included.
3.3.3.23 Automatic flight control system. Automatic flight control and augmentation
systems, including operational checkout procedures and normal operating procedures, shall
be described.
3.3.3.24 Pitot static system. This system, including pitot-static heat, shall be described
and all components receiving inputs from it shall be listed.
3.3.3.25 Flight instruments. The aircraft flight instruments/instrument displays and their
associated systems shall be described. Detailed description and operation of individual
instruments is not required if the same information is provided in other documents (such as
AFMAN 11-217) that are readily available to the flight crew. The requirements of
paragraph 3.2.13d apply to the description of the instruments.
3.3.3.25.1 Integrated flight displays. Integrated flight displays, including head up displays
(HUD) and glass cockpit displays (GCD) shall be illustrated and described in detail.
Dynamics, scale, and sign convention of analog displays shall be described. Unique color
representations (color meaning) for integrated displays shall be defined.
Limitations/restrictions on the use of integrated displays in night or instrument
meteorological conditions (IMC) shall be described. Where flight instrument displays are
interchangeable with other displays (i.e., on multi-function displays), the required display
format for IMC or night flight shall be specified.
3.3.3.25.2 Flight instrument terminology. The terminology used for flight instruments
shall be consistent with those in AFMAN 11-217.
3.3.3.25.3 Auxiliary flight reference system. This system shall be described.
3.3.3.26 Doors, hatches and ladders. Operation of doors, hatches, and ladders shall be
33
described. Instruction for entry into the aircraft, if the entry is not obvious, shall be
included. A diagram(s) of all doors, hatches, and ladders shall be shown to clearly indicate
their location, operating handles or levers, and safety indicators.
3.3.3.27 Canopies. All controls, both external and internal, shall be described. Canopy
defrost, including the settings required for high altitude and the prevention of frost or fog
accumulation during rapid descent, shall be described. A diagram(s) of all canopies and
their controls, indicating the opening, closing, and safety positions, shall be included.
3.3.3.28 Seats, ejection seats, and modules. Crew member seats shall be described.
Ejection seat (module) and controls emphasizing how they are affected by other systems
shall be described in detail. Applicable hardware, including survival equipment, automatic
safety belt controls, triggering device for the automatic parachute, and its correct
attachment shall be described. Appropriate illustrations of the equipment components
shall be included.
3.3.3.29 Air conditioning system. Air source, air conditioning units or heaters, distribution,
temperature regulation, air flow regulation, controls, indicators, and system operation shall
be described. The air conditioning system may be covered as one system, or as several
systems as noted in 3.3.3.29.1 through 3.3.3.29.5. A schematic of the air conditioning
system, indicating the location of key system components of both the air conditioning and
the pressurization systems, shall be included.
3.3.3.29.1 Compartment heat systems. Separate heating system(s) for compartments shall
be described.
3.3.3.29.2 Pressurization system. The source and effects of pressurized air for both normal
and emergency operation shall be described. A pressurization chart depicting the cabin
altitudes that can be maintained at any given aircraft altitude and the maximum cabin-to-
ambient pressure differential shall be included.
3.3.3.29.3 Windshield rain removal system. Rain removal systems such as bleed air,
windshield wipers, repellent systems, controls, and system operation shall be described.
3.3.3.29.4 Anti-icing and de-icing systems. Information for de-icing of the wings, tail,
propellers, pitot heads, temperature probes, angle of attack (AOA) vanes, and engine
intakes shall be included. Windshield ice, anti-ice, ice detection, fog protection, and system
operation shall be included.
3.3.3.29.5 Avionics equipment cooling system. The system(s) or method(s) provided for
cooling avionics or electronic equipment shall be described.
3.3.3.30 Communications and avionics systems. A detailed description, including

operation, of all communications and avionics equipment installed on the aircraft shall be
34
provided. The characteristics, interrelationship of equipment, power source, and power

requirements of these systems shall be described.
3.3.3.30.1 Communications and avionics equipment table. A table of communications and

avionics equipment shall be included. The information shall be as follows:
a. Type - Type of equipment such as interphone, command radio, radio compass,

identification friend or foe (IFF), long range navigation, and radar altimeter.
b. Designation - Placard nomenclature or applicable Air Force designation.
c. Function - Use of equipment such as intercommunication, short range, two-

way voice communication, and instrument landing system (ILS).
d. Operator (for multiple crew member applications only) - Member(s) of the

crew responsible for the operation of the equipment.
e. Location - Location of equipment and controls used to operate equipment.
f. Remarks - Any notes, cautions, or warnings, which are important to the

operation or concerning its effect on other systems in the aircraft. A specific
note stating that no transmissions except for emergency (distress) purposes
shall be made on emergency channels.
3.3.3.31 Lighting system. Exterior and interior lighting systems shall be described. When
specified by the acquiring activity, a diagram showing areas illuminated by exterior
lighting shall be provided (see 6.2).
3.3.3.32 Oxygen systems. Crew and passenger oxygen systems shall be described with the
crew system identified prior to the passenger system. An oxygen duration chart shall be
prepared for each independent oxygen system in the aircraft. The chart shall show hours of
oxygen available for crew and passengers (normal and 100 percent use) for various
combinations of oxygen pressure versus altitude (see Figure 4). The locations of all portable
oxygen bottles, recharger points, types of regulators, and masks shall be identified.
3.3.3.33 Air data computer. The functions of the air data computer and its controls and
indicators shall be described. Systems receiving inputs from the air data computer shall be
listed.
3.3.3.34 Armament/weapons system. Reference shall be made to the nonnuclear and

nuclear munitions delivery manuals for comprehensive coverage of the armament/weapons
system.
3.3.3.35 Stores coverage. Stores coverage shall make reference to Section V of the manual
35
or the load configuration manual for limits and configurations.
3.3.3.36 Personnel accommodations. All personnel accommodations such as seats, bunks,

comfort facilities, galley equipment, litters, coat racks, and equipment provided for the
safety and comfort of personnel shall be described.
36
Oxygen Duration (Typical)

OXYGEN DURATION (HOURS)
COCKPIT PRESSURE DILUTER LEVER GAGE QUANTITY (LITERS)
1 ALTITUDE (FEET) (POSITION)
5 4 3 2 1
C 100% 30.94 24.75 18.56 12.37 6.19

R 35,000 AND UP
NORMAL 30.94 24.75 18.56 12.37 6.19
E
W 100% 22.63 18.11 13.58 9.05 4.53
30,000
M NORMAL 23.00 18.40 13.80 9.20 4.60
E
100% 17.48 13.98 10.49 6.99 3.50
M 25,000
B NORMAL 21.72 17.37 13.03 8.69 4.34
E 100% 13.19 10.55 7.91 5.28 2.64
R 20,000
NORMAL 24.43 19.55 14.66 9.77 4.89
100% 10.62 8.49 6.37 4.25 2.12

15,000
NORMAL 29.86 23.89 17.92 11.94 5.97
100% 8.53 6.83 5.12 3.41 1.71

10,000
NORMAL 29.86 23.89 17.92 11.94 5.97
2 100% 15.47 12.37 9.28 6.18 3.09

35,000 AND UP
NORMAL 15.47 12.37 9.28 6.18 3.09
100% 11.31 9.05 6.79 4.52 2.26

30,000
C NORMAL 11.50 9.20 6.90 4.60 2.30
R
100% 8.74 6.99 5.24 3.49 1.75
E 25,000
W NORMAL 10.86 8.68 6.51 4.39 2.17
M 100% 6.59 5.27 3.95 2.64 1.32

20,000
E NORMAL 12.21 9.77 7.33 4.88 2.44
M
100% 5.31 4.24 3.18 2.12 1.06
B 15,000
NORMAL 14.93 11.94 8.96 5.97 2.98
E
R 10,000
100% 4.26 3.41 2.56 1.70 0.85
S NORMAL 14.93 11.94 8.96 5.97 2.98
NOTES 1. Oxygen duration increases as cockpit pressure altitude increases because there is less ambient
pressure acting upon the lungs. Therefore, a smaller quantity of oxygen at altitude will expand
the lungs to the same size that they were at sea level.
2. Oxygen pressure changes with changes in temperature. As oxygen cylinders become chilled, the
pressure is reduced, sometimes quite rapidly. A temperature drop of 100° F will reduce pressure
by 20 percent.
FIGURE 4. Example of an oxygen duration chart.

37
3.3.3.37 Emergency equipment. All emergency equipment shall be described except

equipment which forms a part of a complete system: i.e., emergency landing gear control
shall be treated under landing gear system. Emergency equipment to be covered shall
include items such as fire extinguishers, emergency alarms, pyrotechnic equipment, axes,
signal lamps, and first-aid kits. An illustration showing the location of all the emergency
equipment shall be provided.
3.3.3.38 Cargo accommodations and aerial delivery. Accesses and space provided for cargo
loading, tiedown provisions, and aerial delivery equipment shall be described. Precautions
to be observed, and references to publications providing information for safe transport and
delivery of cargo shall be included. Reference to the aircraft -9 cargo loading manual shall
be made, as appropriate.
3.3.3.39 Navigation system. This system, its controls and indicators, interrelationship of
equipment functions, and power sources and requirements shall be described.
3.3.3.39.1 Navigational aids. Navigational aids not covered under navigation-weapon

systems such as terrain following radar, tactical air navigation (TACAN), instrument
landing system (ILS), and identification friend or foe/selective identification feature
(IFF/SIF) shall be described. Unless otherwise specified, a note advising the pilot to cross
check all TACAN bearings with whatever means on-hand, such as airborne radar and
ground radar, shall be included.
3.3.3.40 Mission equipment. Special equipment installed on the aircraft to support an

assigned mission shall be described. If a mission crew manual (see 3.5) is developed,
mission equipment information required to support the mission crew manual shall be
located there. A reference to the applicable manual shall be made in Section I of the flight
manual.
3.3.3.41 Miscellaneous equipment. A description and location of all equipment not covered
elsewhere in the manual shall be included. Miscellaneous equipment shall include items
such as protective covers, curtains, signal-light stowage, loose equipment storage, war
readiness material kit stowage, chart holders, scroll checklist holders, and personnel
warning signs.
3.3.3.42 Servicing diagram. This diagram (see Figure 5) shall provide primary and
alternate servicing information and cover items such as tanks, holders, containers, and the
service points of all items that could be serviced, utilized, or controlled by the flight crew.
Emergency fuels shall not be addressed in the servicing diagram. International symbols
and specifications for alternate servicing fluids such as fuel, water, alcohol, hydraulic fluid,
anti-icing fluid, fire extinguisher agent, APU, fuel, oil, and other consumables shall be
included. Reference shall be made to Section V for restrictions resulting from the use of
alternate fluids (see 3.3.7.5.1). The drag chute and the external power cart shall be
included as servicing items. Items such as grease and shock strut fluids shall not be
38
FIGURE 5. Example of servicing diagram.
39
included. The servicing diagram shall normally be the last illustration in Section I.
3.3.4 Section II - Normal procedures. This section shall cover the normal
duties/procedures of the flight crew. Duties of the mission crew are located in Section IV or
the applicable mission crew manual (see3.5).
3.3.4.1 Flight crew normal duties/procedures. This section shall be concerned primarily
with the duties of the crew members who directly contribute to the aircraft operation. It
shall contain all normal procedures that are required once the crew member arrives at the
aircraft, as well as all normal procedures required to accomplish a flight. The procedures
shall include all steps required to ensure flight under conditions such as visual flight rules,
night, and instrument conditions. Each crew member's duties that contribute to the
physical act of flying the aircraft shall be included in this section. (NOTE: Whenever
practical, duties shall be assigned to other crew members in order to minimize pilot duties.)
All other duties relating to the operation of the installed equipment required to accomplish
the assigned mission shall be covered in Section IV. Checking and proper positioning of
installed equipment controls shall be included, if neglect of these operations would affect
the safety or the efficiency of the flight. Function, operation, or effect of controls shall be
repeated here only as required for emphasis. The use of notes, cautions, and warnings shall
be held to a minimum so that their importance is not de-emphasized. Complete coverage
shall be required regarding unique "feel", characteristics, and reaction of the aircraft during
specific phases of operation covered in this section. (Note: Complete flight characteristics
shall be described in Section VI.) Detailed coverage of operations such as taxiing, takeoff,
climb, and instrument flight shall be included. All precautions to be observed during the
various operations shall be covered. All information on emergency procedures shall be
located in Section III.
3.3.4.1.1 Flight crew duties. A discussion outlining the primary duties of each crew
member shall be covered under a single primary paragraph which shall be subdivided into
a introductory paragraph and subordinate paragraphs. The introductory paragraph shall
contain a comprehensive description of the primary and alternate functions of the crew
member. It shall also include a description of the general duties of the crew member, such
as operating the heating system or ascertaining that all hatches in the rear of the aircraft
are securely locked. Subordinate paragraphs shall be included as required to present each
pertinent phase of flight operation, such as "Before Starting Engine" and "Before Takeoff."
3.3.4.1.2 Introductory material. Introductory material shall be included to apprise the

crew of the special problems involved in operating the aircraft and in crew coordination.
Matters such as general mission planning and crew and passenger briefing shall be
covered.
3.3.4.1.3 Danger areas. For jet and turboprop aircraft, an illustration showing danger
areas both forward and aft of engines shall be included (see 3.3.4.1.12). The exhaust
temperatures and velocities at various distances aft of the engines shall be included. The
40
figures for these exhaust temperatures and velocities shall be provided for maximum
power, both with and without afterburner, and for idle power. Danger areas for the
auxiliary power unit exhaust, turbine areas, and assist takeoff bottles as well as turbine
disintegration area, all radiation and any other danger areas, as applicable, shall be
included. Approach and departure areas for helicopters, while rotors are turning, shall be
included. The acceptable noise level areas for personnel equipped with muff type
protectors, aircraft headsets, and ear plugs, as well as personnel with no protection, shall
be reflected. These areas shall be depicted for idle power and maximum power (with and
without afterburner). Noise levels shall be presented in graphical form.
3.3.4.1.4 Checklist program. A description of the checklist program shall be provided.
3.3.4.1.5 Sequence of phases, actions, inspections, and checks. Phases, actions, inspections,
and checks shall be arranged chronologically and designed to avoid requiring crew members
to retrace any steps. All checks shall be made from left to right or top to bottom. Checks
shall be grouped to minimize control manipulation and ground operating time.
3.3.4.1.6 Special inspections. Procedures for aircraft flown under special conditions, such
as scramble or missions requiring intermediate stops, shall be included. Under these
conditions only certain items of the preflight, engine run-up, and other applicable
procedures need be accomplished to assure a safe operation. A note shall be included
stating, "When takeoff is delayed for extended periods of time during intermediate stops
because of conditions such as weather or crew rest, completion of all normal procedures
shall be required." For the aircraft in which special operations frequently occur, a code
shall be developed to identify each item of a normal procedure that must be performed
during the special operation, for example: External power-connected items not coded may
be checked at the discretion of the flight crew except when an aircraft has been cocked for
scramble. In this case it is imperative that only the coded (see 3.2.12.5) items be
accomplished.
3.3.4.1.6.1 Passenger briefing. For aircraft capable of carrying passengers, a line item
titled "Passengers Briefed" is required under both the "Before Starting Engines" and the
"Descent" checklists. Also, a statement shall be included stating that the pilot is
responsible for this briefing. However, it may be delegated to another crew member. A
sample passenger briefing card shall be included. The passenger briefing shall be
presented as follows:
a. Predeparture - Names of flight crew, destination, altitude of flight, time of

flight, use of equipment, location of emergency exits, introduction to alarm
bell and other items (such as smoking on military flights).
b. Over-water - Emergency equipment, location of safety jackets, and other

items.
41
c. Arrival - Advice during descent pertaining to seat belts, local time, no

smoking, and like items.
3.3.4.1.7 Flight planning. A requirement, that items such as fuel, airspeed, and power
settings be determined as necessary to complete the proposed mission, using the data
contained in the performance data (see 3.4.10.9), shall be included.
3.3.4.1.8 Takeoff and landing data card. The reader shall be referred to the appropriate
portion of the manual for an illustration of the takeoff and landing data (TOLD) card and
the proper means of filling it out. When appropriate, a statement specifying when the card
need not be filled out shall be included. The TOLD card shall be included in the flight crew
checklist (see 3.7.5 and 3.4.10.9.1.3.1).
3.3.4.1.9 Weight and balance. A statement instructing the pilot to obtain weight and
balance data for takeoff and landing shall be included. Reference shall be made to the
applicable weight and balance forms within TO 1-1B-50.
3.3.4.1.10 Preflight check. The preflight check shall include all required checks after
arrival at the aircraft and prior to starting engines. On larger aircraft, the interior
inspection may precede the exterior inspection so that controls may be positioned to
facilitate the exterior inspection. The requirements in 3.3.4.1.10.1 through 3.3.4.1.10.4 are
typical and should be followed as listed. The flight crew inspection shall be based upon the
premise that all required maintenance inspections have been completed.
3.3.4.1.10.1 Before inspection . A requirement directing that appropriate maintenance

forms be reviewed for status of the aircraft and that the required maintenance inspections
have been completed and signed off shall be included.
a. Before exterior inspection, the proper position of all controls affecting safety
shall be covered. All other actions essential to perform a satisfactory exterior
inspection, such as unlocking of the flight controls and noting the position
indicated by the trim tab indicators, shall be included.
b. The alarm bell checkout procedures shall precede the application of external
and battery power.
c. All matters which must be considered before the interior inspection is

initiated shall be covered. This would include matters such as connection
and position of external power unit and stationing of personnel outside of the
aircraft to assist in the interior inspection.
3.3.4.1.10.2 Exterior inspection. All exterior points to be checked shall be included,

emphasizing the major components which have an effect on safety of flight. The inspection
shall proceed around the aircraft, presenting the inspection items in a logical sequence. For
42
aircraft equipped with external fuel tanks and no direct reading quantity gauge, the
following shall be included: "Visually check each tank for fuel level. If quantity is
questionable, use dip stick to determine the amount. Assure the caps are replaced and
properly secured." Diagrams covering the paths to be followed and the various checks to be
made during the exterior inspections shall be included.
3.3.4.1.10.3 Interior inspection. The complete interior inspection shall be described and
shall include the following, as required:
a. A check to ascertain that all miscellaneous equipment (see 3.3.3.41) is stowed

as required.
b. Positioning of all applicable controls and the checking of all applicable

indicators.
c. Insofar as practical, all controls shall be positioned as required for engine

starting.
d. Functional checks for all the systems, which can be performed before the
engines are started.
e. For aircraft in which engine power is not necessary, flight controls shall be
checked for free and correct movement.
f. Check headrest area of the ejection seat to determine if the face curtain
handles are properly stowed, the catapult pin is installed and connected to
the removal mechanism, and the catapult firing yoke is properly positioned
and connected.
g. Instructions that the controls be positioned as necessary to facilitate exterior

inspection. Instructions to reposition any controls set to facilitate the
exterior inspection shall be included. (Applicable only for the aircraft where
the interior inspection is performed before the exterior.)
h. Instructions on the use of external power or on-board auxiliary power units,

and any necessary switching involved in its use.
i. Interior inspection diagram for large aircraft.
3.3.4.1.10.4 Before starting engines. Precautions to be observed and checks to be

accomplished "Before Starting Engines" shall be included. These are checks that could not
be properly accomplished during the interior inspection, such as routing of anti-g suit hose,
oxygen system, seats and pedals, safety belt and shoulder harness, and parking brake. If
applicable, a passenger briefing as described in 3.3.4.1.6.1 shall be included.
43
3.3.4.1.11 Starting engines. Complete procedures for starting engines, including the
starting order for multi-engined aircraft, shall be provided. For jet and turboprop aircraft,
procedures to avoid hot starts and precautions to be observed when a hot start is
experienced shall be included. Instructions outlining the restrictions related to the possible
effects of adverse weather during engine start (see 3.3.9.2) shall be included.
3.3.4.1.12 Engine ground operation. Engine speed for warm-up and ground operation shall
be specified in revolutions per minute (RPM). Any special precautions or requirements (i.e.,
operation in supercooled fog etc.) shall be included. Reference shall be made to danger area
illustrations for hazardous operation (see 3.3.4.1.3).
3.3.4.1.13 Before taxiing. All checks to be accomplished before taxiing, such as check of
flight controls for free and correct movement, checkout of the automatic flight control
system, hatches and doors, IFF/SIF, standby control locks, hydraulic pressure, chocks,
obtain clearance to taxi, advising crew, and check safety belt fastener shall be included.
Checks of the safety lock pins may be performed prior to taxiing.
3.3.4.1.14 Taxiing. All information which is useful to the pilot while taxiing, such as the
melting and freezing of ice on painted stripes, precautions to help avoid ground accidents
during the day and night, engine operation, engine power settings, checking of flight
instruments, and crosswinds, shall be included.
3.3.4.1.14.1 Turning radius and ground clearance diagram. A diagram illustrating

minimum turning radius and ground clearances for items such as wings, gear, propellers,
and rotors shall be included. A caution denoting the outward sweep of swept-wing aircraft
during turns shall be included.
3.3.4.1.15 Engine run-up. Complete instructions for checking items such as engine and
propeller operation including power and ignition shall be included. Means of assuring that
the propeller is not in reverse pitch shall be covered. The proper use of brakes during run-
up shall be described.
3.3.4.1.16 Before takeoff. All checks that must be accomplished prior to takeoff, such as
trim tabs, altitude indicator setting, wing sweep position, and flap/slat position, hydraulic
pressure, shall be listed. If applicable to the aircraft and not accomplished prior to taxi (see
3.3.4.1.13), the safety lock pins shall be checked and removed prior to takeoff.
3.3.4.1.17 Line up. Items required to be accomplished between "Before Takeoff" and
"Takeoff" phases shall be included. The procedures shall be as brief as possible.
3.3.4.1.18 Takeoff. Takeoff shall be the period when the aircraft is lined up on the runway
and power is applied for the takeoff run until the aircraft is airborne and cleaned up for the
after takeoff climb. The transition to forward flight for helicopters shall be considered a
part of the takeoff. The takeoff discussion shall include information covering an engine
44
failure during takeoff and a reference to Section III for the appropriate emergency
procedures. A description of the takeoff, covering procedures necessary to complete a
normal takeoff shall be included. The normal takeoff shall be the one upon which the
takeoff data, in the performance data, is predicated (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.1). A statement of this
fact shall be included. As a minimum, the following shall be included in the takeoff
procedures:
a. Use of controls to overcome engine torque, if applicable.
b. Force required to lift nose wheel or tail wheel, if applicable.
c. Conditions that may affect takeoff such as runway surface covering (RSC),
runway condition reading (RCR), crosswind, runway length, runway slope,
ambient conditions, and obstacle clearance (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.8).
d. Takeoff configuration such as external stores, center of gravity (CG) location,

gross weight, and flap position (see 3.4.10.3).
e. Effect of trim changes that may be required after breaking ground.
f. Recommended procedures such as the use of brakes, anti-skid, flaps, and

trim; and the effects of deviating from the recommended procedures.
g. Peculiarities of the particular type of aircraft (for example: Vertical/short

takeoff and landing aircraft, conventional aircraft, and helicopters).
h. Peculiarities of the particular model (for example: Some aircraft reach flying
speed before they reach rotation speed with forward CG).
i. High altitude takeoffs and runway requirements.
j. Means of determining when a takeoff should be aborted.
k. Effects of wake turbulence (wing tip vortices) on the specific aircraft being
covered. Include time interval before taking off behind helicopters, large
aircraft, etc. Include procedures to be used such as attempt to remain above
and upwind of the preceding aircraft's flight path.
l. Instrument takeoff procedures where they differ from normal procedures or a

statement that they are the same.
m. Any other item requiring consideration.
3.3.4.1.19 Takeoff, landing, instrument approach, and missed approach diagrams.
45
Diagrams covering each phase of takeoff, landing, instrument approach, and missed
approach shall be included. The landing and the missed approach diagrams may be
presented separately or as a single illustration. These diagrams are not intended to show
paths to be flown but are intended to establish steps of procedure chronologically; therefore,
care shall be taken not to imply that the illustrated path must be followed literally. The
titles of these illustrations shall include the word "typical" to prevent this
misinterpretation. The diagrams shall indicate the specific actions required to accomplish
the indicated phase of operation, such as: "release brakes" and "retract flaps in 10 degree
increments." Each of these diagrams shall be based on a normal takeoff or landing gross
weight. The weight and configuration on which the diagram is based shall be prominently
displayed. Emphasis shall be placed on the fact that airspeeds are based on this single
weight. To avoid confusion with the checklists the actions in these diagrams shall not be
numbered. Depending on the complexity of the aircraft, the variation in airspeeds shall be
covered by references to the performance data, percentage of stall, or incremental increases
in airspeed with weight of fuel remaining. Tabular presentations showing variation of
airspeeds with weight shall not be included.
3.3.4.1.20 Special type takeoffs. Other types of takeoff such as instrument, catapult
launched, assisted, short field, and rotor bleed (helicopters), shall be covered, including
appropriate "Warnings" and "Cautions". Unusual takeoffs shall be included only with the
approval of the acquiring activity and the flight manual manager (see 6.2). For helicopters
and conventional aircraft that can be operated from or in proximity of terrains having
adverse winds or drafts, coverage with necessary illustrations explaining how to cope with
these conditions shall be included.
3.3.4.1.21 After takeoff climb. All actions to be accomplished immediately after takeoff
such as braking wheels, retracting landing gear, or retracting flaps shall be included.
Applicable provisions for an oxygen system check shall be made. If flap retraction
procedure differs under various conditions such as heavy weight or weather, this
information shall be included. Minimum airspeed and altitude for retracting flaps shall be
covered. For aircraft of highly variable gross weight, the climb shall be covered, and the
airspeed at which climb should be started shall be stated (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.19). Maximum
angle of bank versus minimum flap retract speed shall be covered. Control of the aircraft
under instrument flight conditions from takeoff through acceleration to climb speed shall be
included.
3.3.4.1.22 Climb. Normal climb procedures that are required to produce the results stated
in the performance data climb charts (see 3.4.10.4) shall be included. Proper positioning of
engine cooling flaps and the relation of airspeed to cooling shall be emphasized.
3.3.4.1.23 Cruise. Actions that must be taken when the transition from climb to cruise is
made shall be covered. Any particular actions that must be considered during cruise flight
shall be covered. Actual procedures shall not be included in this paragraph beyond those
required to transition from climb to cruise.
46
3.3.4.1.24 Flight characteristics. Reference shall be made to Section VI for information

regarding flight characteristics.
3.3.4.1.25 Descent. The procedural steps for the descent phase of operation shall be
included. The checklist shall include all checks which must be made immediately before
and during descent to land. Normal descent procedures required to produce the results
stated in the performance data charts shall be covered in detail. Special instructions
regarding various types of descent such as enroute, tear drop, rapid (with spoiler), and
rapid (clean) penetration shall be included.
3.3.4.1.26 Holding. Airspeeds and other pertinent information for various holding
configurations shall be included.
3.3.4.1.27 Instrument approaches. Procedures for all instrument approaches shall be

included. Applicable precautions and restrictions shall be covered. Diagrams to illustrate
approach patterns with consideration of aircraft configuration and capability (see
3.3.4.1.19) shall be provided.
3.3.4.1.28 Automatic approach. Preparations, procedures, and precautions to be followed

during the automatic approach shall be covered. Unsatisfactory approach indications, and
procedures for discontinuing such an approach shall be described.
3.3.4.1.29 Circling Approaches. Aircraft configuration, airspeed, maximum bank angles,

and angle of attack shall be described. If the airspeed used during the circling maneuver
exceeds the maximum speed allowed for that aircraft's instrument category, the
appropriate higher category shall be specified.
3.3.4.1.30 Before landing. All applicable procedures and steps that must be accomplished
prior to landing shall be covered (see 3.4.10.8). A fuel check shall be provided. Reference
shall be made to the weight and CG limitations covered in Section V.
3.3.4.1.31 Landing. The problems that may be encountered during the landing phase shall
be discussed. Normal landing procedures that are required to produce the results
stated in the landing charts of the performance data shall be covered (see 3.4.10.8).
Procedures such as use of brakes, nose wheel on or off the runway, and drag chute
deployment shall be included. The procedures for each type of landing that can be made
shall be included. For vertical takeoff and landing aircraft, the transition from
conventional flight shall be discussed. The effects of wake turbulence on the landing phase
of the specific aircraft shall be covered. Include time interval before landing behind large
aircraft, helicopter, etc. Include hazards of penetrating the center of the vortex core.
Reference shall be made to Section VII for description of hydroplaning. Unless otherwise
specified by the acquiring activity, the information included in this paragraph need not be
in checklist form (see 6.2).
47
3.3.4.1.32 Go around/missed approach. All instructions such as trim changes and flap
settings for executing a go around/missed approach shall be included. Proper throttle use
shall be emphasized. A diagram as described in 3.3.4.1.19 shall be provided.
3.3.4.1.33 Touch and go landings. Touch and go landing procedures, including any
differences caused by use of the crosswind landing gear, shall be provided. Traffic pattern
procedures shall be included, or may be combined with the "Before Landing" or "Touch and
Go" procedures provided all essential items are covered. The procedures shall note that
touch and go landings introduce an element of danger because of the many rapid actions
that must be executed while rolling on the runway at high speed.
3.3.4.1.34 After landing. All checks and operations to be accomplished after turnoff from
runway and before the parking area is reached shall be included.
3.3.4.1.35 Hot refueling. If applicable, coverage shall include all procedures required (and
necessary precautions to be taken) before entering the refueling area, during refueling, and
when departing the area.
3.3.4.1.36 Engine shutdown. The proper procedures for engine shutdown, including all
precautions to be observed shall be provided.
3.3.4.1.37 Postflight. Procedures necessary to accomplish the postflight check shall be

included.
3.3.4.1.38 Before leaving aircraft. Actions necessary to position all controls and control
locks and to secure the aircraft shall be covered. Procedures, as applicable, shall be
provided to ensure that classified codes have been removed from any system installed (i.e.,
IFF/SIF). A requirement for the flight crew to make entries into the AFTO Form 781
recording any flight limits that have been exceeded, shall be included.
3.3.4.1.39 Alert procedures. Since a crew on alert status will use the alert procedures
checklist as their master checklist, the alert procedures checklist shall include all the
procedures required to operate the aircraft under the alert concept. Once the crew member
is in the midst of the alert checklist, there shall not be any reference to the normal
procedures checklist. Normal operating procedures contained in the normal flight crew
checklist shall be included in the alert checklist. This allows the duplication of those
procedures only in the alert checklist. The alert section of the flight manual may contain
the normal procedural step without amplification. This will allow for continuity in learning
the procedures without having to reference throughout the flight manual. Appropriate
references shall be made to the normal operating procedures section in the aircraft flight
manual for amplification. Amplification of the alert procedural entries shall be avoided if
such amplification is already provided in the normal procedures. The addition of alert
procedures shall have no effect on the normal procedures. The following detail
requirements applicable to alert procedures shall be included.
48
3.3.4.1.39.1 Explanatory material. A complete explanation of the alert concept, the

interrelationship of crew members including the ground crew, and the proper use of the
checklist shall be included as an introduction to the alert procedures. Each phase of
operation shall include an explanation of the purpose of the phase and when it is employed.
3.3.4.1.39.2 Arrangement of the alert procedures. The alert procedures shall be divided
into two parts. One part shall be a chronological sequence of events when the aircraft is
put on alert, is cocked, scramble is performed, and normal flight is continued. The other
part shall be the phases of operation that do not follow any particular chronological pattern.
The following example could be the phases of operation for a typical manual:
PREFLIGHT
1. Accomplish "Before Interior Inspection," "Interior Inspection," and "Exterior

Inspection" as set forth in the normal conditions.
COCKING
SCRAMBLE
AFTER TAKEOFF-CLIMB
1. After takeoff, return to the normal conditions beginning with "After Takeoff-
Climb."
NOTE: The following phases of operation have no particular chronological

identification but will have to be used while the aircraft is on alert status as
circumstances dictate.
DAILY PREFLIGHT
UNCOCKING
TAXI BACK
1. ..................
ETC.
3.3.5. Section III - Emergency procedures. Section III of the flight manual shall describe
the procedures to be followed to meet any emergency that could reasonably be expected to
occur. The requirements specified in the following paragraphs are not all-inclusive. The
emergency section shall be developed based on the best available data for the particular
aircraft. Emergency operation of auxiliary equipment shall be covered only insofar as it
affects safety of flight. Emergency systems and equipment shall be described in Section I of
the manual. Section III shall administer only procedural information. All pages containing
49
emergency information shall be bordered by emergency page markings as specified in MIL-

STD-38784. Complete coverage regarding the "feel" characteristics, and reaction of the
aircraft during various emergencies affecting flight such as flight with one or more engines
inoperative and trim failure, shall be provided. All precautions to be observed while coping
with an emergency shall be discussed. Combinations of emergencies are normally not
covered because of the numerous possible combinations. (see 6.9). Emergency procedures
requiring expediency in landing shall be written with full consideration of the expected
time-to-failure after initial malfunction of the critical system(s) (see 6.6). The terms "Land
as Soon as Possible" and "Land as Soon as Practical" are defined in the introduction to
Section III (see 3.3.5.4), and shall be used throughout the section as general guidance
(where appropriate) to relate to the aircrew the degree of urgency in landing.
3.3.5.1 Arrangement. The emergency procedures in Section III shall be presented either by
phase of operation or by system as specified by the acquiring agency (see 6.2).
3.3.5.1.1 Phase of operation arrangement. If an emergency can occur in more than one
phase of operation, it shall be presented in the phase where it is most likely to occur first.
When phase of operation arrangement has been specified, the sequence shall be as
presented below:
a. Introduction (see 3.3.5.4)
b. General Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.5)
c. Ground Operation Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.6)
d. Takeoff Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.7)
e. In-flight Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.8)
f. Landing Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.9)
g. Miscellaneous Emergencies (see 3.3.5.11)
3.3.5.1.2 System arrangement. Under the system arrangement philosophy, the General
Emergency Procedures portion shall contain such "flight oriented" procedures as; out of
control and spin recovery; ejection and bailout; emergency descent; forced landing; ditching
and so on. The coverage and content requirements for non-system oriented procedures are
the same as for the phase of operation arrangement. When system arrangement has been
specified, the sequence shall be as presented below:
a. Introduction (see 3.3.5.4)
b. General Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.5)
50
c. System Emergency Procedures (see 3.3.5.10)
d. Miscellaneous Emergencies (see 3.3.5.11)
3.3.5.2 Narrative versus numerical presentation. Normally, if the crew member must
analyze the emergency to determine subsequent actions, available information needed to
help determine the correct action shall be presented in narrative form. All definite
procedures shall be presented in numerical steps.
3.3.5.3 Critical emergency procedures. The critical emergency steps (boldface type) in a
critical emergency procedure shall be the steps that must be performed immediately
without reference to a written checklist. Any other steps, when there is time to consult a
checklist, shall be considered noncritical and shall be in standard type. A statement
requiring crew members to be able to demonstrate correctly, the accomplishment of bold
faced procedures in the published sequence without directly referring to the checklist, shall
be included.
3.3.5.3.1 Criteria for determining critical emergency procedures. Critical emergency

procedures, if required, shall be selected from the basic emergency procedures by the
contractor. These procedures shall be approved by the procuring activity. The criteria for
determining a critical emergency procedure shall be as follows:
a. It must be a serious emergency.
b. It must be acted upon immediately with no time to refer to the printed

checklist.
c. It must have a reasonable frequency rate.
3.3.5.3.2 Criteria for critical emergency steps. If an emergency procedure is determined to

be critical, it shall be as follows:
a. It shall be easy to understand and learn.
b. It shall contain only the items that must be performed immediately to

alleviate the emergency sufficiently to permit time for the flight crew to refer
to the printed checklist.
c. It shall be as brief as possible.
d. It shall consist of consecutive primary line items. Critical and noncritical

emergency steps shall not be intermingled. For example, if steps 1 and 5 are
critical, steps 2, 3, and 4 shall also be critical, or the procedure shall be
rearranged so that steps 1 and 5 are consecutive line items and not
51
intermingled. Further, the sequence shall begin with the first critical
procedural step.
e. Line items directing standard action such as alerting the crew and
maintaining directional control, or items involving a crew member's analysis
and judgment of the particular situation, such as "land as soon as practical",
shall not be included as critical emergency steps. This information is
addressed in the introduction to Section III.
f. The terms contained in the glossary of terms shall be used to the maximum
extent possible without deviating from the requirement to utilize crew station
placarded terms.
g. Insofar as possible, the nomenclature used, regarding the action to be

performed, shall be the same between aircraft containing like items or
procedures.
3.3.5.4 Introduction. The introduction shall include information on the layout and use of
the section and a statement outlining the three basic rules to emergency actions. This
statement should be similar to: "In all emergencies, the overriding considerations must be
to: 1. Maintain aircraft control. 2. Analyze the situation. 3. Take proper action." The
introduction shall explain the general information that will not be found in, but will apply
to, all critical emergency procedures (see 3.3.5.3.2). An illustration shall be provided to
show locations of the miscellaneous emergency equipment (see 3.3.5.12.1). In addition, the
introduction shall contain the following definitions for; Land as Soon as Possible; and Land
as Soon as Practical.
Land as Soon as Possible - An emergency will be declared. A landing should be

accomplished at the nearest suitable airfield considering the severity of the
emergency, weather conditions, field facilities, ambient lighting, aircraft gross
weight, and command guidance.
Land as Soon as Practical - Emergency conditions are less urgent, and although
the mission is to be terminated, the degree of the emergency is such that an
immediate landing at the nearest adequate airfield may not be necessary.
3.3.5.5 General emergency procedures. The general emergency procedures shall include
all reasonably expected emergencies that could occur in two or more phases of operation or
affect two or more systems or subsystems. This grouping is intended to separate the
procedures which are treated as an entity and are not associated with a particular phase of
operation or system. Care shall be taken to restrict the procedures of this grouping to
prevent destroying the phase or system grouping of Section III of the manual and to
eliminate confusing cross-referencing during an emergency.
52
3.3.5.5.1 Minimum control speeds (air and ground). Minimum control speeds (air and
ground) shall be presented either by a single paragraph or by separate paragraphs under
the general emergency procedures or in the appropriate phase of operation. The minimum
control speed for the aircraft including information such as "with and without" boost and, if
applicable, pertinent information in sequence such as gross weight, power available,
application, aircraft configuration, crew duties, and recovery techniques shall be discussed.
Reference shall be made to the performance data for definitions of minimum control speeds.
3.3.5.5.2 Engine failure under various conditions. Actions to be taken in the event of
engine failure under various conditions shall be included. Complete procedures to be
followed in shutting down the malfunctioning engine and establishing continued flight shall
be included. A diagram covering takeoff, landing and missed approach with one or more
engines inoperative (see 3.3.5.12.3), shall be provided. Insofar as possible, the shutdown
procedures shall be identical to the procedures required in the event of engine fire. These
procedures shall be subdivided under three individual paragraph headings as follows:
a. Maintain necessary control and power - Items such as regaining lost power by
advancing throttles and adjusting mixtures on good engines and regaining
flight control shall be described in narrative form.
b. Shutdown - The critical steps necessary to stop the engine and prepare to
fight a possible engine fire shall be included.
c. Clean-up - The noncritical steps required to completely shutdown the engine,

trim the aircraft, and establish necessary power settings for continued flight
shall be included. If practical, a common shutdown procedure which is
applicable to the various engine emergencies requiring shutdown shall be
given.
3.3.5.5.3 Abort and barrier engagement. As applicable, a combined procedure for both
abort and barrier engagement (applicable to takeoff or landing) shall be provided. Where
applicable, it shall include use of the tail hook. The considerations for making the decision
whether to abort and whether to engage the barrier shall be discussed. Engaging the
barrier on the approach end of the runway and the type of emergencies which might
warrant this engagement, shall be mentioned. Mention shall be made of stores that may be
jettisoned on the runway to reduce aircraft weight to barrier and tail hook limitations or to
improve configuration and increase probability of engagement and that this jettisoning is
done at the pilot's discretion. A narrative comparison of the danger of jettisoning stores on
the runway with the improved capability of barrier engagement shall be included.
3.3.5.5.4 Canopy or hatch retention or jettisoning. Where applicable, an explanation of the

advantages of retaining the canopy or hatch for crash landing, aborted takeoffs, and barrier
engagements shall be included. Instructions to disconnect all leads and restraints, that
could delay evacuation before opening the canopy, to minimize the crew members' exposure
53
time to dangers such as fires, outside explosions, and debris, shall be included. Instructions
to use normal canopy opening procedures and each alternate method to open the canopy
shall be included. The safest alternate method and the hazards involved shall be listed
first; the second safest alternate shall be listed second and so on, until all methods are
included. The canopy breaker tool shall be discussed. (Note: An exception to retaining the
canopy is in the case of ditching. In the case of ditching, the canopy should be jettisoned.)
It shall also be mentioned that the helmet visor should be in the down position for crash
landings, aborted takeoffs, and barrier engagements.
3.3.5.5.5 Landing gear retraction while on the ground. The possibility of retracting the
landing gear while the aircraft is on the ground as a last resort to stop the aircraft shall be
discussed. Procedures shall be included as necessary.
3.3.5.5.6 Jettisoning external stores. The advantages and disadvantages of jettisoning

external stores on the ground and in flight, the types of stores that may be jettisoned and
the possibility of jettisoned stores colliding with the aircraft or other aircraft in close
proximity shall be discussed.
3.3.5.5.7 Emergency ground egress. Procedures for evacuating the aircraft shall be
included. Appropriate warnings such as the inadvertent deployment of a survival kit shall
be included. Items such as primary and alternate escape routes and location of doors and
escape hatches to be used shall be specified.
3.3.5.6 Ground operation emergency procedures. Ground operation emergencies shall be

all emergencies that occur when the aircraft is on the ground except during takeoff and
landing. The various types of emergencies which may occur on the ground and the
procedures which should be followed to meet each emergency shall be described. An
emergency egress illustration shall be provided (see 3.3.5.12.2). The ground operation
emergencies shall not include takeoff and landing.
3.3.5.6.1 Engine fire or overheat during start or shutdown. Complete instructions

regarding the recommended procedures for addressing an engine fire or overheat condition
shall be included. One or more procedures may be necessary depending on the aircraft.
Insofar as possible, a common engine shutdown procedure following various engine
emergencies shall be used; ideally, it will be the same as the normal engine shutdown
procedure.
3.3.5.6.2 Emergency brake system operation during taxi. A discussion of brake failures,
most likely to occur, which would warrant use of emergency or alternate brake operation
shall be included. Caution against using the emergency brake system if applicable, shall be
included. Limitations of the emergency brake system or alternate brake operation shall be
mentioned. Pertinent operating information shall be included. Secondary emergencies that
may arise from continued operation of an aircraft with a brake system failure, such as loss
of hydraulic fluid, shall be mentioned. If applicable, how to prevent such secondary
54
emergencies shall be mentioned.
3.3.5.6.3 Loss of nose landing gear steering. A discussion of the steering failures most
likely to occur, especially hardcover signals which would warrant use of emergency or
alternate steering, shall be included. Pertinent operating information shall be included.
Secondary emergencies that may arise from continued operation of an aircraft with a
steering failure, such as overheated brakes, shall be discussed.
3.3.5.7 Takeoff emergencies. Takeoff emergencies shall be all the emergencies that could
occur after the pilot performs the first takeoff action listed in the takeoff procedures in
Section II of the manual and ends when the climb configuration or the emergency landing
configuration is established.
3.3.5.7.1 Engine failure during takeoff. The possibilities of both forced landing and
continued flight shall be included. Information concerning jettisoning external stores,
landing gear retraction, pilot techniques, and best airspeed for power available (partial loss
of power) shall be included. Reference shall be made to the paragraph concerning runway
barrier engagement in Section III of the manual.
3.3.5.7.2 Takeoff with one or more engines inoperative. For multi-engine aircraft, in which
takeoff with less than all engines operating is feasible, instructions for such takeoff shall
be included. Warnings and precautions shall be discussed. Procedures required to produce
the results stated in the appropriate takeoff chart in the performance data of the manual
shall be employed. If necessary, a diagram similar to the one required for normal takeoff
shall be included.
3.3.5.7.3 Tire failure during takeoff roll. A discussion of the procedures required to be
observed in the event of tire failure during takeoff roll shall be included.
3.3.5.7.4 Fire or overheat light during takeoff. Complete precautions and instructions for
fire or overheat light during takeoff shall be included.
3.3.5.8 In-flight emergencies. In-flight emergencies shall include all emergencies that
could occur from the time the climb configuration is established until the final landing
configuration is established. If an emergency (including the loss of controlled flight) will
lead to a loss of altitude, the minimum altitude that will be required to recover the aircraft
and the point at which ejection or bailout should occur shall be stated. An illustration shall
be provided depicting maximum glide (see 3.3.5.12.7). If a multi-crew aircraft will require
the ejection of the crew members who are nonessential for flying, sooner than the ejection of
the crew members who are essential for flying, the procedures shall specify when the crew
members who are nonessential for flying shall either eject or bailout.
3.3.5.8.1 Out of control procedures. Out of control flight and how it is different from a spin
shall be defined. The specific procedures that are needed to return to controlled flight and
55
the sequence in which the procedures are to be accomplished shall be stated. If the
sequence of the procedures is not important, this fact shall be included. What the pilot will
see (the instruments and the dynamic relationship to the earth), how the aircraft will
respond to flight control inputs, and how the pilot will recognize when the aircraft is or is
not responding shall be described.
3.3.5.8.2 Spin recovery. Spin recovery procedures shall be included. The accompanying
text shall refer to Section VI of the manual for an explanation of the spin characteristics of
the aircraft.
3.3.5.8.3 Engine restart. Complete instructions on the proper means of restarting an

engine in flight and resuming normal flight shall be included. Specific details such as
airspeed, altitudes, and RPM shall be included. If considered advantageous, engine restart
instructions may be presented in chart form. When applicable, a warning shall be included
to address safe ejection altitude versus the time it takes to develop usable thrust from
minimum airstart RPM.
3.3.5.8.4 Propeller malfunction. Complete procedures to be performed in the event of

runaway propeller and any other type of propeller failure shall be given. Instructions
regarding action to be taken if propeller does not feather properly shall be included.
3.3.5.8.5 Ejection or bailout. The technique, precaution, and warning signals for leaving
the aircraft in flight shall be described. These instructions shall contain information
pertaining to all ejection/bailout options under varying conditions such as (but not limited
to) airspeed, aircraft attitude, controlled and uncontrolled flight (including spins and dives),
and the minimum safe altitudes for ejection/bailout under each of these conditions.
Complete coverage for bailout from aircraft not equipped with ejection systems shall be
included. Bailout in the event of ejection seat failure shall be covered in narrative form
only. The proper procedure for preparing the aircraft for bailout and the method of
jettisoning cockpit enclosures and exterior doors shall be indicated. For aircraft equipped
with an escape capsule, the instructions, techniques and precautions involved in use of the
escape capsule shall be included. A pictorial sequence of operation for ejection or bailout
shall be provided.
3.3.5.8.5.1 Operation of seat-type survival kit. For aircraft that utilize some form of a seat-
type survival kit, a statement which explains whether activation of the survival kit does (or
does not) cut off emergency oxygen supply shall be included. If it does, it shall state that
the survival kit should be deployed below 14,000 feet above sea level. In any event, the
procedures shall be written to require the survival kit deployment prior to contact with
ground or water.
3.3.5.8.6 Fire, smoke, and fumes. Complete emergency procedures regarding fire, smoke,
and fumes aboard the aircraft shall be provided. Information concerning fire warning
indicators, fire suppressant discharge, alternate procedures, fire out confirmation, and the
56
procedures for adjusting for the possible after effects of fire shall be provided. When
applicable, information shall be provided concerning the disabling of systems that may be
feeding the fire. Procedures for the rapid evacuation of smoke and fumes from the aircraft
interior, and the use of aircrew oxygen and smoke equipment, shall be provided.
3.3.5.8.6.1 Engine fire during flight. Complete instructions regarding the recommended
method of detecting and extinguishing an engine fire during flight shall be included.
Procedures for afterburner overheat shall be included for jet aircraft so equipped.
3.3.5.8.6.2 Fuselage and wing fire. Complete instructions regarding the recommended
method of combating a fire within the aircraft fuselage and wings shall be provided.
3.3.5.8.6.3 Electrical fire and overheat. Complete instructions regarding the recommended
method for extinguishing electrical fires shall be provided. If some fire extinguishers
provided are not to be used for electrical fires, that fact shall be stated. Procedures to
address electronic overheat conditions that may occur during flight shall be provided.
3.3.5.8.7 System failures. Procedures to address the in-flight failure of systems which
would result in an emergency situation shall be provided. Instructions, as applicable, to
permit the system to be operated in a degraded condition shall be provided. Information, as
applicable, to cover alternate or backup systems that may be engaged to accommodate for
the loss or severe degradation of a primary system shall be provided. Examples of systems
to be covered are, but not limited to; fuel, oil, electrical, hydraulic, and flight control.
3.3.5.8.8 Shock effects to engine or aircraft. If supersonic speeds are possible and give rise
to emergencies, procedures to cope with the emergencies such as duct instability and
variable inlet ramps shall be covered.
3.3.5.8.9 Flight without canopy. The hazards of flight without a canopy or without a hatch,
including wind blast effects, shall be discussed.
3.3.5.8.10 Crew environment emergencies. Procedures for emergencies such as failure of

anti-g suit to deflate, loss of pressurization, excessive temperature (air conditioning), and
hypoxia shall be included.
3.3.5.8.11 Emergency descent. If the difference between a rapid descent and an emergency
descent is sufficient to affect the safety of the personnel aboard the aircraft, techniques and
procedures for an emergency descent shall be included.
3.3.5.8.12 Structural failure. A structural failure procedure shall be included. This

procedure should include necessary pilot and crew procedures in the event of suspected or
actual structural failure.
3.3.5.9 Landing emergencies. Landing emergencies shall include all emergencies that
57
could occur from the time the final landing configuration is established until the aircraft is
stopped or departs from the runway. Statements that the canopies should be retained for
all landings and that combustion type heaters should be off for emergency landings shall be
included. For both hard and soft ground, the following shall be included: Preparation,
warning signals to crew, approach, crew positions, harness locks, landing procedures, and
crew/passenger exit. The procedures to be followed to ascertain the degree of aircraft
control available when control system malfunction occurs shall be included.
3.3.5.9.1 Forced landing or landing with one or more engines inoperative. The changes in
configuration and procedures, and the recommended precautions required for a forced or
engine(s)-out landing shall be included. In the event of complete loss of power, it shall be
emphasized that ejection or abandonment of the aircraft may be preferable to forced
landing, as applicable. Procedures for landing single-engine and twin-engine jet aircraft
without thrust shall be included. A missed approach with one or more engines inoperative
shall be discussed. A note that the pilot, prior to ejection or abandonment, should attempt
to turn the aircraft toward an area where injury or damage to property on the ground or
water is least likely to occur shall be included.
3.3.5.9.2 Simulated forced landing or flame-out landing. Procedures for performing a

simulated forced landing or flame-out landing shall be included. The danger of falling
behind the required airspeed and the best procedures for recovery shall be discussed. Other
areas to be considered are areas such as altitude at high key and low key, aircraft
configuration, pattern airspeeds, and engine speed. Warnings and cautions as applicable
shall be included. A note that the aircraft should always be in a position from which a
landing can be completed shall be added.
3.3.5.9.3 Landing gear malfunction. Procedures for emergency extension of the landing
gear shall be included. Procedures for combinations such as main gear down, nose gear up,
one main gear up, nose wheel cocked, and all gear up shall be included. Procedures for a
wheels-up landing shall be included.
3.3.5.9.4 Ditching (applicable aircraft). Complete instructions regarding the method and
the best configuration for ditching the aircraft shall be included. Capabilities of the aircraft
after ditching and the advantage of ditching versus bailout or vice versa shall be discussed.
The discussion shall include night ditching, partial-power ditching, power-off ditching,
preparation for ditching, and after ditching. The discussion shall also include blocked
escape routes and alternate duties in case some crew members are injured. An illustration,
as applicable, showing ditching and crash-landing stations for crew members and
passengers, shall be provided (see 3.3.5.12.5). In addition, a ditching chart and sea state
table shall be included (see 3.3.5.12.6).
3.3.5.9.5 Landing without brakes. Procedures for accomplishing a landing when brakes are
inoperative and system failures that could lead to this emergency shall be discussed. If
failure of these systems affects any other areas, the area affected shall be mentioned. It
58
shall be noted that emergency brakes (if applicable) are limited to a certain number of
applications.
3.3.5.9.6 Other landing emergencies. As applicable, emergencies such as flap failure, speed
brake failure, asymmetric loads, leading edge slat failure, tire failure upon landing, and
scraping of tail shall be covered.
3.3.5.10 System emergencies. When system arrangement has been specified, the
emergency procedures shall be grouped for each major system of the aircraft. The use of
high level system groupings (i.e., flight controls rather than flaps) is preferred. The high
level systems may be broken down to aircraft specific subsystems to ease location of specific
emergencies.
3.3.5.11 Miscellaneous emergencies. Critical emergency items shall not appear in the
miscellaneous group.
3.3.5.11.1 Emergency entrance. If required by the acquiring activity, instructions

regarding means of effecting emergency entrance into the aircraft shall be included (see
6.2).
3.3.5.11.2 Hung ordnance. Procedures to be taken when ordnance has failed to leave
aircraft after triggering shall be included.
3.3.5.12 Illustrations (Section III).
3.3.5.12.1 Miscellaneous emergency equipment. A phantom illustration shall show

aircraft emergency equipment such as stowed parachutes, fire axes, flares, pyrotechnic
pistols, life rafts, hand-held fire extinguishers, and first-aid kits. This illustration shall not
include system emergency equipment such as emergency hydraulic controls, engine fire
extinguishing systems, and emergency landing gear controls.
3.3.5.12.2 Emergency egress. If the aircraft is a manned aircraft, and is large enough to
permit circulation of personnel, the emergency stations and the routes of egress to be
followed for ground emergencies, in-flight, and after crash-landing on land or water shall be
indicated for all personnel. Coding shall be used to differentiate between routes and exits
to be used in flight and routes and exits to be used after a crash-landing. This illustration
may be combined with the miscellaneous emergency equipment diagram, unless the
resulting illustration would be confusing. Additional illustrations showing the operation of
all emergency exits from inside the aircraft shall be included. The location of each exit
shall be indicated on a caption drawing(s) of the aircraft.
3.3.5.12.3 Takeoff, landing and missed approach - one or more engines inoperative
diagram. A diagram emphasizing the difference between normal procedures and
procedures with one or more engines inoperative shall be included. Items such as
59
minimum airspeeds and effects on systems or inoperative systems because of certain

engines out shall be emphasized. If there is little or no difference in the full-power
available and partial-power available landing, they may be combined with the normal
diagram in Section II of the manual, with proper notations. If the diagram for this
emergency is identical to the normal procedures, the requirement for this illustration may
be deleted; however, a reference should be made to this effect in the text.
3.3.5.12.4 Smoke identification diagram. A diagram indicating the means of identifying

the source of reciprocating engine fires, by the type of smoke and flames emitted from the
engine compartment, shall be included.
3.3.5.12.5 Ditching and crash landing stations. As applicable, a diagram showing the
position of each crew member and passenger during ditching and crash landing shall be
included.
3.3.5.12.6 Ditching chart and sea state table. A ditching chart and a sea state table shall
be included. The ditching chart shall include first actions of the crew members, necessary
duties at planned times, equipment items that the crew member is responsible for having
in his possession after ditching, position of the crew member during ditching, and most
probable egress route for the individual crew member positions. A statement that the
sequence of events may be varied depending on existing conditions shall be included on the
ditching chart.
3.3.5.12.7 Maximum glide. An illustration for maximum glide, providing all parameters
that affect gliding distance with partial-power or power-off, for maximum glide distances
and minimum rate of descent, shall be included. The airspeeds shown shall be integer
numbers divisible by five and in knots indicated airspeed (KIAS), and the altitudes shall be
for all altitudes below absolute ceiling. The data basis for all helicopters, single-engine
aircraft, and twin-engine aircraft shall be given.
3.3.5.12.8 Warning/caution advisory (WCA) display analysis illustration. A

warning/caution advisory display analysis illustration shall be included and shall be the
last illustration preceding the emergency entrance illustration. It shall list each warning
and caution annunciator, the malfunction causing the annunciator to be displayed, and how
to cope with and clear the condition.
3.3.5.12.9 Emergency entrance diagram. A diagram illustrating points at which

emergency entrance can be effected into the aircraft after it has crash-landed shall be
included. It shall be the last page of Section III of the manual, and the text for emergency
entrance shall immediately precede it.
3.3.6 Section IV - Mission crew duties/procedures. This section shall cover the
responsibilities of each crew member not covered in Section II and shall include a
description of the primary and alternate functions of each. The development of procedures
60
in this section shall follow the requirements of Section II unless development of such
procedures falls under a separate detail specification. When specified by the acquiring
activity, a separate mission crew manual shall be prepared (see 3.5). The acquiring activity
shall determine if all or portions of this section shall be included in Mission Crew
Manual(s) (see 6.2). Depending on the content remaining in Section IV, the following shall
apply:
a. If all of Section IV is included in a separate manual(s), then a statement that

Section IV material is located in the other manual(s) shall be placed under
the section title.
b If only portions of Section IV are included in a mission crew manual, then the
system title shall be included in Section IV followed by a reference to the
applicable manual. The remainder of the section shall be as specified below.
3.3.6.1 Coverage. Duties of each crew member shall be covered under a single primary
paragraph which shall be subdivided into an introductory paragraph and subordinate
paragraphs. The introductory paragraph shall contain a comprehensive description of the
primary and alternate functions of the crew member. It shall also include a description of
the general duties of the crew member, such as operating the heating system or
ascertaining that all hatches in the rear of the aircraft are securely locked. Subordinate
paragraphs shall be included as required to present each pertinent phase of flight
operation, such as "Before Starting Engine" and "Before Takeoff."
3.3.6.2 Extent of coverage. Emphasis shall be placed on the duties that are driven by the
characteristics of the aircraft. A minimum of space shall be devoted to the specialized
duties that are the responsibilities of a crew member by virtue of that function; for example,
the navigator is fully aware of the responsibilities of a navigator, but may have additional
responsibilities assigned.
3.3.6.3 Crew coordination. A summary of the responsibilities of each crew member shall be
included. It shall also relate the coordinated actions between each crew member.
3.3.6.4 Sequence of phases and actions. Sequence of phases and actions shall be arranged
chronologically.
3.3.6.5 Checks. All checks shall be made from left to right or top to bottom except where
chronology must take precedence.
3.3.6.6 Alignment. This section shall be aligned, according to the physical location of the
crew members covered, starting from the front and proceeding to the rear, with the left
position taking precedence over the right position.
3.3.7 Section V - Operating limitations. This section shall cover all important limitations
61
that must be observed. Limitations that are characteristic only of a specialized phase of
operation shall be covered in the discussion of the operation and need not be repeated in
this section. Special emphasis shall be placed on any unusual restrictions that are
particularly characteristic of the aircraft.
3.3.7.1 Extent of coverage. The following paragraphs describe the types of limitations to be
covered; however, only the criteria that actually limit operation need be included. For
example, if the design of the aircraft precludes overloading, a weight limitation discussion
is unnecessary. To avoid duplication of limitations, the information appearing on the
instrument marking pages shall not be repeated in the text. If the instrument marking
limitations cannot be adequately explained in the space provided by the captions,
additional explanations shall be covered under the appropriate paragraph headings. Mach
numbers and airspeeds shall be given in the same units as indicated by installed
instruments. Tables of servicing fluids, and when specified, aircraft capacities shall be
included with a listing of fuels (see 6.2). Fluids shall not be listed by brand name; however
a reference to TO 42B-1-14 for fuels and TO 42C-1-16 for alcohols shall be included.
3.3.7.2 Emergency crew. A statement shall be included that specifies the Emergency Crew
requirements as applicable (see 3.3.3.1).
3.3.7.3 Instrument markings. Each instrument that indicates an operating limit shall be
illustrated. Each illustration that contains an engine power instrument shall include a
notation of the fuel grade on which the limits are based. The notation shall be
conspicuously located and shall be printed in 12 point boldface type. This illustration shall
always begin on the first full page following the table of contents in Section V.
3.3.7.4 Summary table of limitations. When specified (see 6.2), a Summary Table of
Limitations shall be provided. The table shall include a summary of the aircraft and
system operating limitations as provided in Section V. This table shall immediately follow
the Instrument Markings.
3.3.7.5 Engine limitations. Engine limitations covering points such as overspeed, turbo
limitations, idle limitations, overboost, overtemperature, and inverted flight shall be
included. Limitations that must be observed when alternate fuel grade is used shall be
provided. A definition of power referenced in the text and in the performance data (see
3.4.10.2) such as maximum thrust, maximum power, and maximum except for takeoff
(METO) power, shall be included. For helicopters, the various conditions that limit power
such as gas producer speed on a cold day and transmission limits shall be included (see
3.4.10.10.3.3).
3.3.7.5.1 Alternate fluid limitations. If applicable, this paragraph shall identify alternate
fluids that may be used with possible loss of efficiency and increased maintenance/overhaul.
These alternate fluids shall be listed in the aircraft servicing diagram (see 3.3.3.42).
62
3.3.7.5.2 Emergency fuel limitations. This paragraph shall identify emergency fuel, if
applicable, that may cause sufficient damage to the engines so that its use shall be limited
to a single flight. Include a notation that after an aircraft has been flown with emergency
fuel, identify this condition in AFTO Form 781 and ensure that required inspections have
been made before releasing for flight. These fuels shall not be listed in the aircraft
servicing diagram (see 3.3.3.42). A statement that operations or maintenance personnel
shall not grant waivers on the use of emergency fuel beyond one time flights shall be
included.
3.3.7.5.3 Single-engine/engine-out flight limitations. Performance limitations due to

primary or secondary flight controls, trimming requirements, optimum climb/cruise
profiles, maneuvering limitations, and landing phase considerations shall be included.
Flight characteristics limitations with engine(s) operating in the secondary or backup
control mode shall be included.
3.3.7.6 Starter limitations. The limitations applicable to the starter system shall be
included.
3.3.7.7 Propeller limitations. Propeller limitations covering points such as reverse pitch
and restricted RPM shall be included when applicable.
3.3.7.8 Rotor limitations. Rotor limitations during flight, power-on and power-off, and
during ground operation shall be included for helicopters. Limitations directly related to
time shall be clearly stated. The maximum recommended wind velocity for starting and
stopping rotors shall be included.
3.3.7.9 Airspeed and mach limitations. Maximum mach or airspeed limits shall be
provided for level flight and for various conditions of weight and configuration. Additional
airspeed and mach limitations such as the following shall also be included (see 3.2.22):
a. Maximum dive airspeed.
b. Airspeed limitations for jettisoning external stores.
c. A chart showing limiting airspeed versus altitude for various configurations

or minimum and maximum rotor speeds.
3.3.7.10 Flight maneuvering limitations. Flight maneuvering limitations such as the

following shall be included:
a. Acrobatic flight.
b. Restrictions on control movements and bank angle limits.
63
c. Limits for slipping or skidding during asymmetric power condition or landing

approaches.
d. Roll coupling phenomena such as roll entry G, angle of attack (AOA)

overshoots, and rolling limits.
e. If the manual is for a high speed, highly maneuverable aircraft, a diagram

showing acceleration limits for the combinations of airspeeds and altitudes
shall be included. Direct reading mach meters shall reflect the reading
utilized in the cockpit. Charts for calibrated airspeed (CAS), or indicated
airspeed (IAS) and indicated mach number (IMN) shall be included. All
prohibited regions of operation shall be clearly marked.
3.3.7.11 Acceleration limitations. Acceleration limitations such as the following shall be

included:
a. Maximum acceleration with tip tanks.
b. Maximum bank at high weights.
c. Maximum permissible accelerations under various flight conditions at

specific gross weights and fuel versus load distribution.
d. Purpose of the operating flight strength diagram (see 3.3.7.10e).
3.3.7.12 Hovering limitations. Hovering limitations such as maximum crosswind and

downwind (including gusts) and their relation to maximum sideways and rearward flight,
limitations caused by recirculation effects, and gross weight limitations shall be included.
3.3.7.13 Center of gravity limitations. Center of gravity (CG) limitations such as the
following shall be included:
a. Effects such as forward, aft and lateral CG position on towing, taxiing, hover,
stall, takeoff, in-flight, approach, and landing.
b. Limitations due to the use of external or internal hoists or winches.
c. Cargo loading limitations due to CG restrictions.
d. A CG envelope chart shall be included when necessary. Reference to the

Weight and Balance Handbook and the -5 series technical order shall be
included.
3.3.7.14 Weight limitations. Weight limitations that are not covered or are not emphasized
64
sufficiently in the weight limitations chart (see 3.3.7.14.1) shall be included. Limitations
for aircraft in which weight distribution is a problem (such as minimum fuel to be carried in
the wings at various gross weights) shall be included. Reference shall be made to fuel
supply management in Section I (see 3.3.3.8). Text shall contain a tabulation of normal,
emergency, and overload takeoff gross weights and design zero fuel weight for the aircraft.
Sample problems illustrating the affect of aircraft loading shall be presented. Problems
concerning an aircraft that has an operating weight greater than the operating weight on
which the chart is based, shall be included.
3.3.7.14.1 Weight limitation chart. This chart shall be provided for aircraft that have
weight limitations of such a complex nature that it would be impractical to cover by means
of text only (see 3.3.7.14). Each component of the chart shall be clearly identified. The
purpose of this weight information is to provide operating personnel with the detailed
criteria upon which the importance of the mission can be weighed against the degree of risk
that is being assumed; not to establish maximums (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.11). A single chart shall
be used to portray the weight capabilities of the aircraft; however, additional charts may be
used, when necessary, to portray the various configurations of the aircraft. Various criteria
that affect gross weight shall be represented as indicated in 3.3.7.14.1.1 through
3.3.7.14.1.7 except that criteria which are beyond the weight capabilities of the aircraft
need not be shown.
3.3.7.14.1.1 Operating weight chart. The chart shall be based on the standard operating
weight of the aircraft. The operating weight shall be quoted in boldface type in a
conspicuous part of the chart, or a correction grid shall be included for aircraft that have
variable operating weights.
3.3.7.14.1.2 Alternate load. The alternate load which consists of cargo, bombs, and
nonstandard equipment shall be shown along the vertical axis of the chart. It shall be
noted that an alternate load shall not include any weight carried by the wings. Any load in
or under the wings, except fuel or disposable tanks, shall be shown by the use of additional
charts.
3.3.7.14.1.3 Fuel versus alternate load capacity envelope. The various combinations of fuel
and alternate load that can be carried by the available capacity of the aircraft shall be
illustrated by an envelope. The envelope shall begin at the maximum alternate load and
shall show the addition of fuel (with removal of alternate load as necessary) until maximum
fuel capacity is reached. Each phase of addition of fuel and removal of alternate load shall
be identified.
3.3.7.14.1.4 Weight limiting factors. Lines representing the various weight limiting factors
affecting taxi, takeoff, flight, and landing gross weights shall be included. The basis for the
limiting factors shall be as defined in JSSG-2006 (formerly AFGS-87221) for structural
limitations. Lines representing other factors that will be detrimentally affected by
increasing weight shall also be included.
65
3.3.7.14.1.5 Gross weight. The gross weight of the loaded aircraft shall be shown by lines
sloping to the axis of the chart. It shall be noted that the origin of the chart represents the
standard operating weight of the aircraft (see 3.3.3.1.2).
3.3.7.14.1.6 Stores chart. A chart showing certified stores, weapon loading capability, and
restrictions to be observed shall be included. Only stores that are compatible with the
aircraft shall be listed. Stores that are not compatible but are to be carried, shall be listed
on separate illustrations with sufficient instructions for permissible operation and ample
warning on restrictions. If the aircraft is equipped to carry a variety of external stores,
information concerning the maximum weight to be carried at each station and the
maximum lateral unbalanced load that can be carried shall be included. If a separate
loading configuration manual is procured, this information shall be included in the load
configuration manual. A reference to the appropriate publication shall be made in this
Section of the flight manual.
3.3.7.14.1.7 Brake energy limits chart. A chart showing brake energy limits for various
weights, speeds and configurations shall be included.
3.3.7.14.2 Weight limitations chart requirements. Light and dark shading shall be used to
emphasize areas of varying degrees of risk. The unshaded area shall include loadings
which present no particular problem in regard to strength or performance of the aircraft.
The light shaded area shall cover loadings of progressively increasing risk as the dark
shaded area is approached. A statement, that caution must be exercised in this area
because certain operations may become marginal and aircraft life may be decreased, shall
be included. The dark shaded area shall represent loadings that are not recommended.
Operation in the dark shaded area should be attempted only when the importance of the
mission is such that safety of flight is of secondary consideration.
3.3.7.14.3 Disposal of cargo and stores. All limitations imposed by the disposal of cargo or
stores during flight shall be included.
3.3.7.14.3.1 Fuel and external disposal tanks. The weight of fuel and external disposable
tanks shall be shown along the horizontal axis of the chart.
3.3.7.15 Barrier limitations. Barrier limitations, with an illustration showing the

maximum barrier engaging speeds versus weight for airplane and various arresting
systems in use shall be included. Maximum engaging speeds versus weight combinations
shall be based on the maximum permissible arresting hook load or the arresting system
(barrier) strength, whichever is the lesser.
3.3.7.16 Drag chute limits. Speed limits for drag chute deployment and any other
applicable limits shall be included (see 3.4.10.8.1.3.2).
3.3.7.17 Landing limitations. All landing limitations such as the rate of descent, glide
66
slope, landing, and maximum sink rate shall be included (see 3.3.4.1.25).
3.3.7.18 Other limitations. Other types of limitations that affect operation of the aircraft
shall be included.
3.3.8 Section VI - Flight characteristics. This section shall fully describe the flight
characteristics of the aircraft. Unless otherwise specified, this section shall contain as a
minimum, the following areas: (see 6.2)
a. Flight control system.
b. Normal flight characteristics.
c. Dive recovery characteristics
d. Flight with asymmetric loads.
e. Abnormal flight characteristics.
f. Stalls.
g. Departures.
h. Spins.
i. Engine operation.
3.3.8.1 Extent of coverage. Coverage in Section VI will vary depending on the type of
aircraft covered. The subjects listed in the following paragraphs shall be addressed in
describing aircraft flight characteristics. Applicable subjects shall be covered in detail. Any
aircraft unique flight characteristics not outlined below shall also be included. All flight
limitations should be addressed in Section V and limitations, warnings, or cautions which
are not in Sections I, II, or V, shall not be mentioned in Section VI. This section should also
address the flight characteristics relative to automatic or integrated systems, such as
terrain following, flutter/load alleviation, flight/propulsion control systems, etc., that may
be unusual but normally expected.
3.3.8.2 Flight control system.
3.3.8.2.1 Control effectiveness. The effectiveness and reactions that may be encountered in
the use of the flight controls throughout the entire flight envelope shall be included (see
3.3.7.10). When and how the controls are used to achieve maximum performance and any
precautions that must be observed shall be stated. Primary and secondary flight controls
(e.g. aileron, elevators, rudders, trim tab, speed brakes, slats, cyclic stick, cyclic pitch, etc.),
67
control augmentation systems, and other aerodynamic considerations shall be included.
3.3.8.2.2 Control forces. Characteristics such as roll, yaw, and stick forces per gravity (G),
in relation to different airspeeds and altitudes shall be included. Susceptibility to G
overshoot and pilot induced oscillation (PIO) shall be described. Charts depicting incidents
such as sideslip maneuvering envelopes (depicts relationships between AOA and angle of
sideslip) shall be included.
3.3.8.3 Normal flight characteristics. Normal flight characteristics shall include the
following flight regimes as a minimum:
a. Heavy takeoff and landing.
b. Lightweight takeoff and landing.
c. Normal cruise.
d. Maneuvering (to include maximum performance, wing sweep, and AOA

considerations) with respect to varying altitude and external stores loading.
e. Rolling G flight.
f. Negative G flight.
g. As a minimum, charts with the following details shall be provided:
(1) Maneuverability (altitude versus airspeed depicting G available at

varying gross weights and drag configurations).
(2) CG travel (with respect to fuel consumption).
(3) Pitch rate (show aircraft capabilities to achieve pitch rates which
could result in G or AOA overshoot).
3.3.8.4 Dive recovery characteristics. High and low speed diving characteristics of the
aircraft shall be described. Dive recovery procedures and precautions shall be covered. A
chart showing dive recovery techniques (various G pullouts for combinations of altitude,
airspeed, dive angles, and various aircraft configurations) shall be included.
3.3.8.5 Flight with asymmetric loads. Flight characteristics resulting from asymmetric
loads shall be described for takeoff, maneuvering, and landing (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.2). This
description shall amplify roll response, trim consideration, AOA limitations, and weapons
delivery precautions. All mission phases which are applicable for the particular weapon
system shall be addressed.
68
3.3.8.6 Abnormal flight characteristics. Aircraft flight characteristics with malfunctions in

the primary and secondary flight controls (e.g., aileron, elevators, speed brakes, slats,
collective pitch, etc.) shall be described. In addition, flight characteristics with control or
stability augmentation system malfunction or the effects of emergency positions selected
shall be described.
3.3.8.6.1 Roll coupling. Roll coupling characteristics of the aircraft shall be included (see
3.3.7.10).
3.3.8.6.2 Aircraft unique characteristics. If an aircraft exhibits unique flight

characteristics or unique flight control configuration, it shall be described in this section.
Examples of this would include auto rolls, manual reversion, or inverted pitch hang-up.
3.3.8.6.3 Single-engine/engine-out flight characteristics. A description of flight

characteristics and handling qualities with a single engine remaining or multiple engines
out shall be included. Performance limitations due to primary or secondary flight controls,
trimming requirements/techniques, optimum climb/cruise profiles, maneuvering
limitations, and landing phase considerations shall be included. Include flight
characteristics for multi-engine aircraft operating between air minimum control speed
(VMCA) and 1G stall speed. Any other characteristics that adversely affect flight shall be
included. A chart showing engine-out thrust required (for thrust limited aircraft in certain
configurations) shall be provided.
3.3.8.6.4 Unusual attitudes. If the unusual attitude recovery methods for an aircraft differ
from those prescribed in applicable service directives, they shall be described in detail.
3.3.8.7 Stalls. The following stall characteristics shall be described as appropriate:
a. 1G, accelerated, and negative G stalls.
b. Aircraft motions following vertical tail slides.
c. Stall characteristics in the takeoff, power approach, and landing

configuration.
d. Power and landing configuration.
e. Power effects on stall characteristics.
f. Stall warning systems and relation to high AOA characteristics.
g. Effects of changes in weight, altitude, and external stores configuration (to

include typical combat loads).
69
h. Recovery characteristics and procedures.
i. A chart showing stall speeds (gross weight versus CAS/IAS/AOA at varying

bank angles).
j. A complete discussion of helicopter stall characteristics and the appropriated

corrective actions.
3.3.8.8 Departures. Transition from stall to departure shall be described and shall include
effectiveness of the flight controls to prevent or recover from departures. The following
shall be included:
a. The effect of changes to both the longitudinal and lateral CG location.
b. The effects of changes in weight, altitude, and external stores configuration

(to include typical combat loads).
c. Post stall gyration characteristics.
d. Departure recovery procedures and characteristics shall be emphasized, with

an estimate of altitude loss to recover.
e. Known pilot control actions such as excessive magnitudes, abruptness, delay,

or wrong phasing which must specifically be avoided to prevent
inadvertently transitioning the aircraft from a departure into a spin while
attempting recovery.
3.3.8.9 Spins. A complete discussion of the characteristics of spins that are unique to the
aircraft shall be provided. Specific recovery procedures shall be provided in Section III.
3.3.8.10 Engine operation. Engine operation during uncontrolled flight shall be described.
Precautions to prevent loss of engine(s), additional recovery problems resulting from loss of
engine(s), and restart capabilities shall be included.
3.3.9 Section VII - Adverse weather operation. This section shall provide information
pertaining to the operation of aircraft under adverse weather and climatic conditions such
as snow, ice, rain, fog, extreme temperatures, turbulent air, and desert operations. This
section shall be primarily narrative in nature since Section II provides procedures under
normal instrument flight conditions. Procedural items shall be used only to cover specific
procedures that are characteristic of adverse weather operations such as oil dilution or
preparation for turbulent air flight. Procedures included in this section shall comply with
the requirements for procedures in Section II and shall have numbered steps for inclusion
of separate procedures in the abbreviated checklist.
70
3.3.9.1 Turbulence and thunderstorms. Handling characteristics of the aircraft in

turbulence and thunderstorms shall be included. Unique procedures, including all
preparations to be made before entering turbulence or thunderstorms, shall be described. If
a single airspeed is used to penetrate turbulence it shall be presented in large boldface
numerals. If more than one penetration airspeed is provided they shall be presented in a
chart. Information pertaining to the effects of lightning on the aircraft, flight crew, and
aircraft systems (as well as warnings and cautions) shall be included in the text where
necessary.
3.3.9.1.1 Wind shear. A detailed description concerning the detection of wind shear and its
effects on the aircraft shall be provided. Information concerning the special handling
techniques and any preparations that must be made before engaging wind shear shall be
provided.
3.3.9.2 Snow, ice, rain, fog, and slush. The problems caused by snow, ice, rain, fog and
slush shall be described in a separate paragraph for each phase of operation, e.g., "starting
engines", "taxi", and "takeoff" including the effects of water and slush spray on engines,
gear wells, and flaps. Appropriate warnings that prohibit takeoff with snow, ice, or frost on
lifting surfaces, engine cowlings, or any other surface that may adversely affect
performance, shall be included. Effects of engine power and airspeed on the performance of
ice and rain removal systems shall be included. Indications that can forewarn of engine
icing such as manifold pressure, tachometer, exhaust gas temperature, engine pressure
ratio (EPR), and rough engine shall be included. If the aircraft is not equipped with
carburetor air temperature or mixture temperature gauges, outside air temperature (OAT)
at which icing can occur during climb, cruise, and descent shall be provided. The problem
of jet engine damage caused by the ingestion of ice and the preventive measures such as
nacelle heat and engine screens shall be described. Effects of ice accumulation during flight
shall be emphasized. The consequences that may result from engine icing shall be
included. Appropriate warnings or cautions, on engine or auxiliary power unit (APU)
operation in conditions where there is the potential for ice to develop, shall be provided.
3.3.9.2.1 Effects of ice and snow on runways, taxiways, and ramps. This paragraph shall
contain information applicable to runway conditions when ice and snow are present and
shall include the following:
a. Painted areas on runways, taxiways, and ramps are significantly more

slippery that unpainted areas. In addition, painted areas may serve as
condensation surfaces and it is possible to have wet, frosty, or icy conditions
on these areas when the overall weather condition is dry. Refer to AFH 11-
203, Weather for Aircrews.
b. When conditions of snow or ice exist, the approach ends of the runway are
usually more slippery than any other areas due to the melting and freezing of
ice and snow at this location.
71
3.3.9.2.2 Hydroplaning. Conditions that could contribute to hydroplaning and the

problems caused by hydroplaning shall be discussed in detail.
3.3.9.3 Cold weather, hot weather, and desert/tropical operation. Any special
precautions/procedures necessary when operating the aircraft in cold weather (such as
allowing sufficient warm-up of instruments), hot weather, deserts, or tropical environments
shall be included. Appropriate warnings covering the effects of extreme cold on the
aircraft's emergency escape systems such as emergency slides, escape hatches, doors and
windows, pneumatic actuators, etc., shall be provided
3.3.10 Section VIII - Air refueling procedures. If developed as a separate section, the air
refueling section shall contain four major parts. Additional data and information may be
required by the procuring activity and if required will be included in the appropriate part
(see 6.2).
a. General
b. Flying safety
c. Terminology
d. Air refueling procedures
3.3.10.1 General. The general part shall provide the scope of the air refueling section and
any other pertinent data required by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). This part shall also
provide the scope of the air refueling procedures covered. Proper control and utilization of
this section will ensure concurrent inter-command distribution of standard and up-to-date
air refueling data to tanker and receiver crew members.
3.3.10.1.1 Deviations. Deviations from the procedures contained in the air refueling section
must be authorized in detail by a specific operations order or a command directive.
3.3.10.1.2 Part 1 - General. This part shall contain the following general information and
operational procedures which encompass air refueling operations by all types of aircraft:
a. Command and control of tanker/receiver forces.
b. General tanker/receiver responsibilities. Information to specific aircraft

types/models shall also be included.
c. Refueling airspace requirements.
d. Weather restrictions.
72
e. Communications requirements.
f. Visual signals.
3.3.10.2 Part 2 - Flying safety. This part shall address flying safety issues which are
particular to air refueling operations in general, e.g., flying large numbers of dissimilar
aircraft in close proximity, conducting rendezvous in controlled airspace, etc. This part
shall also contain those specific guidelines and lessons learned as specified by the acquiring
activity (see 6.2).
3.3.10.3 Part 3 - Terminology. This part shall include a comprehensive glossary of terms
and abbreviations used in air refueling operations. Terms which refer only to a particular
class of aircraft or refueling technique, e.g., fighter, bomber, probe/drogue, boom/receptacle,
etc., shall be clearly identified.
3.3.10.4 Part 4 - Air refueling procedures. This part shall contain the following major
paragraph divisions:
a. Departure/en route procedures.
b. Rendezvous procedures.
c. Specific Air refueling procedures.
3.4 Performance data. Performance data shall be delivered either as a separate manual
appendix or as an appendix within the flight manual (see 6.2). Regardless of location of the
performance data, all data shall be prepared as specified herein. The requirements of
3.4.10 through 3.4.10.8.1.5 apply to development of performance data for fixed-wing
aircraft. The performance data requirements for helicopters are contained in 3.4.10.10.
Unless otherwise specified herein, the general requirements on chart preparation and
content contained in 3.4.2 through 3.4.9 shall apply to all performance data charts.
3.4.1 Performance manual requirements. For development of a separate performance data

manual, the preparation of front matter shall be as specified in paragraph 3.3.2.
3.4.2 Extent of coverage. Any charts, or other required information, that are applicable to
the performance of the aircraft shall be included, to define the total operational envelope of
the aircraft even if it exceeds the users planned operational envelope. Unless otherwise
specified by the acquiring activity (see 6.2), all performance data charts presented in the
flight manual shall be in Drag Index Format (see 3.4.3.3). Charts for multi-engine aircraft
shall include curves covering operation after failure of one or more engines. Two or more
requirements for any part of the performance data may be combined into single charts if it
does not degrade or complicate use of the chart. Except as specified in 3.4.10.10 the
requirements of the following sections shall apply to helicopters.
73
3.4.3 Format for data presentation. Graphical or tabular presentation of performance data
is essential to provide coverage of the complete operational envelope. Specific user
requirements for graphs and the additional tables shall be coordinated among the acquiring
activity, the contractor, and the user as early as possible in the acquisition process.
3.4.3.1 Graphical. All performance data presented in the flight manual shall be prepared
in graphical format. For aircraft with multiple drag indices, charts shall be prepared using
the drag index format (see 3.4.3.3). If the aircraft does not have multiple drag indices, then
all charts shall be prepared without a drag index grid.
3.4.3.2 Tabular. Tabular presentations will normally be limited to data presented in the
flight crew checklist and those tables specifically authorized for the flight manual. Any
additional use of tabular presentation of performance data in the flight manual shall be
authorized by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). Tabular presentations in the flight manual
shall be limited to informal presentations. Tabular data shall be supplemental to, and
derived from, the graphical data.
3.4.3.3 Drag Index. This format allows for the presentation of performance data for a large
number of external stores/drag configurations on one chart, thereby reducing the number of
charts required. It also allows for future modifications and changes.
3.4.3.4 Specific configuration. In some circumstances, it may be more advantageous to

prepare separate performance data charts for certain configurations. In cases of alternate
configurations involving a change in performance of 5 percent or less, the configurations
may be grouped. If the configurations differ more than 5 percent, separate charts shall be
included (see 3.2.23).
3.4.3.5 Nomographs. Nomographs shall not be used unless specified by the acquiring
activity (see 6.2).
3.4.4 Chart data basis. Basic aerodynamic data used in preparing the charts shall be
derived from flight tests if available; otherwise, estimates shall be used until verified by
flight tests. Engine power and fuel flow data used in preparing the chart shall be derived
from the engine manufacturer's specification unless flight tests indicate an adjustment is
required to reduce specification power/thrust or to increase specification fuel flow. Charts
using estimated data will be replaced by charts using flight test data when it becomes
available.
3.4.4.1 Standard atmosphere. The US Standard Atmosphere, 1976.
3.4.4.2 Fuel flow conservation. When performance data is estimated, fuel flows shall be
increased by 5 percent. When performance data has been flight tested, the following shall
apply to fuel flows:
74
a. For helicopters, add an operational factor of 5 percent.
b. For fixed-wing aircraft, do not add an operational factor unless approved by

the acquiring activity (see 6.2). If it is included, it shall not exceed 5 percent.
3.4.4.3 Performance ground rules. The ground rules described for calculating performance
are intended to furnish the most simple and accurate data available to the operating crews.
In cases where those rules result in data which is not consistent with flight test or accepted
operational techniques, it is expected that the more realistic data will be utilized after
proper technical substantiation.
75
FIGURE 6. Example performance data chart (typical).
76
3.4.4.4 Identification of marginal operations chart. Performance charts provided for

aircraft operation under conditions that are marginal and could lead to aircraft damage or
accident shall be marked in accordance with the requirements of MIL-STD-38784 for
emergency page marking.
3.4.5 Specific chart requirements (also applies to helicopters).
3.4.5.1 Chart layout. Charts shall be prepared so they can be read while holding the
manual in the same upright position required to read the text (see Figure 6). Charts shall
be laid out using the following guidelines:
a. Provide maximum size and space for data.
b. Notes and borders shall be minimized.
c. Simple presentations are preferred over excessive background art work.
d. Single line presentation in lieu of multiline presentations are preferred.
e. Data lines shall be at least c-inch apart.
f. The two outside lines in a series of converging lines should be continued to a

point, cross, or to the end of the chart. The other lines in the series should be
discontinued when they converge to c-inch separation.
g. Cross-hatching over grid patterns should be avoided. Shading should be used

in lieu of cross-hatching over grid patterns, or the grid patterns should be
omitted in the area containing the cross-hatching.
3.4.5.2 Chart construction. Scales, baselines, parameters, lettering, and numbering shall
be in bolder print. Scales and parameters for altitude shall increase vertically on the page.
Other units shall increase from left to right or vertically upwards on the page, except that
the gross weight scale on a range or time integration chart shall decrease from left to right.
3.4.5.2.1 Gridlines. Gridlines may be either screened lines or solid lines. In either case,
the desired effect shall be a tone difference between gridlines and plotted curves. Basic grid
structure should be composed of major (heavy) lines for each major unit, intermediate
(accented) lines halfway between major lines, and minor lines for each sub-unit. Sub-units
shall be 0.05, 0.1, 0.2, or 0.5 of the major unit as most suitable for presentation.
3.4.5.2.2 Grid spacing. Grid spacing on the printed page shall be limited to a maximum of
20 gridlines per inch and a minimum of 4 gridlines per inch.
3.4.5.2.3 Chart entry. Single chart entries should be used wherever possible. Double
77
entries shall be used only when single entries cannot be utilized.
3.4.5.2.4 Baseline. A baseline is the zero correction line when entering a correction chart
such as temperature, wind, RCR, etc. Baselines shall normally be placed at the entry point
to the chart. When required, a baseline may be placed within a chart, provided the line is
clearly marked with a descriptive title.
3.4.5.2.5 Interception of lines. Interception of lines at angles of less than 30° shall be
avoided.
3.4.5.2.6 Transfer scales. Charts may extend beyond one page; however, the entrance scale
on the succeeding page shall match the exit scale of the preceding page. If no exit scale
exists, a transfer scale that permits accurate transfer from the exit point to the entrance
point of the continued chart shall be utilized.
3.4.5.2.7 Scales. Scales, curves, and guidelines for each parameter shall bracket the lowest
value to the limit value for that parameter specified in Section V and shall also extend to
the next major unit for that parameter.
3.4.5.2.7.1 Limitations and restrictions. Limit lines shall be included and labeled to
represent any safety limitation(s) or restrictions deemed necessary by the acquiring activity
(see 6.2).
3.4.5.2.7.2 Temperature scales. Temperature scales in Centigrade (Celsius) shall be used.

Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity, subscales in Fahrenheit shall be
included (see 6.2).
3.4.5.2.7.3 Air temperature scales. Ambient air temperature scales shall be labeled, "air
temperature". The temperature obtained from the aircraft temperature gauges shall be
labeled, "indicated outside air temperature" (IOAT).
3.4.5.2.7.4 Air temperature range scales. The air temperature range on the charts shall be
from -60°C to +60°C.
3.4.5.2.7.5 Standard-day temperature correction scales. Temperature correction scales

showing corrections from standard-day temperature values shall range from -20°C below
standard to +20°C above standard.
3.4.5.2.7.6 Altitude scales. Altitude lines and scales for sea level shall be labeled "sea
level" in lieu of "zero" as the altimeter may indicate.
3.4.5.2.7.7 Drag index scales. The chart is intended to be general, therefore, the major
index lines shall be identified by whole numbers for ease of interpolation.
78
3.4.5.2.7.8 Airspeed scales. Airspeed scales shall meet the requirements specified in
3.2.22. Charts connected with in-flight operation may incorporate a secondary true
airspeed (TAS) scale.
3.4.5.2.7.9 Weight scales. The gross weight scale shall bracket data from minimum
operating weight to the maximum overload takeoff weight.
3.4.5.2.8 Correction grids. All charts associated with takeoff and landing shall have
correction plots attached for runway slope, wind velocity, RCR, RSC, CG, flap correction,
and rotation speed increase using the baseline, guideline, or reflector line format. All
corrections shall be made after the basic values have been determined. When approved by
the acquiring activity, the correction grids described in 3.4.5.2.8.1 through 3.4.5.2.8.7 shall
be grouped on a separate page opposite the basic chase around graph to improve accuracy of
the data (see 6.2).
3.4.5.2.8.1 Slope correction. Runway slope correction shall be 0 to 3 percent uphill and
downhill.
3.4.5.2.8.2 Wind velocity correction. Wind correction plots shall be for 0 to 40 knots
headwind and 0 to 20 knots tailwind. Tailwind lines shall be dashed lines superimposed on
solid headwind lines. All wind correction plots shall be for 100 percent accountability.
3.4.5.2.8.3 Basis for wind correction. An aircraft operating with an existing headwind or
tailwind will experience a variation in performance on the runway in
acceleration/deceleration characteristics. Since basic acceleration distance, speed and time
curves, and refusal speeds are computed for still air (zero wind) performance, a correction
curve shall be added to the charts to permit determination of performance characteristics as
a function of the wind.
3.4.5.2.8.4 RCR correction. These grids shall show the increases in stopping distance
required when braking coefficients of friction on dry hard surface runways deteriorate
because the surface is partially or completely covered with water, snow, or ice. RCR
correction shall be plotted from a baseline of 23 to 2. Rules for computation; estimated data
shall be based on an RCR of 23 having a maximum effective braking coefficient of friction of
0.3 with a straight line relationship to an RCR of zero being equal to an effective breaking
coefficient friction of zero. Data based on flight tests shall also show correction from a
baseline of 23 to 2.
3.4.5.2.8.5 RSC correction. Data based on the latest technique for measuring effects of
RSC shall be included. Precautions such as surface covering impingement on aircraft
during takeoff, its effect on takeoff roll and stopping effect including hydroplaning shall be
included.
3.4.5.2.8.6 Flap setting correction. Individual charts shall be used for each flap setting.
79
However, if a correction grid can be constructed it shall, with the approval of the acquiring
agency, be substituted for individual charts (see 6.2). Separate charts shall be presented
for each flap setting used for takeoff.
3.4.5.2.8.7 CG correction. The CG correction shall be plotted to include foreword and aft
limits with the baseline at the CG for the clean aircraft with maximum internal fuel and
zero payload (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.11).
3.4.5.2.9 Labels for curve(s) within a chart. Each curve set shall be given a descriptive title
such as 99 percent max range, pressure altitude, gross weight, etc. Titles shall not
interfere with the readability of the chart.
3.4.5.2.10 Title block. The title block shall be placed at the top of the page. The maximum
size of the title block shall not exceed the top quarter of the image area.
3.4.5.2.10.1 Bordered title. A descriptive title that is bordered on all four sides shall be
included in the upper portion of the title block. It shall be located horizontally in either the
center or outer (unbound) portion of the title block as determined by the acquiring activity
(see 6.2).
3.4.5.2.10.2 Title block information. The title block shall contain all the information
required to utilize the chart. The following information is to be furnished, as applicable, in
the title block of each chart provided. The title block shall be located at the top of the figure
and shall not interfere with the information presented in the chart. The following charts
shall be included:
a. Descriptive title (Bordered title see 3.4.5.2.10.1).
b. Aircraft model(s).
c. Engine types and model, and propeller designation.
d. Fuel grade (unless it has been included in the performance data

introduction).
e. Drag index if applicable (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.1).
f. Atmospheric conditions such as pressure altitude, density altitude,

temperature, standard-day condition, variations from standard-day
conditions, and wind.
g. Operational conditions such as external tanks and armament, number of

operating engines, power plant settings, mixture settings, flap positions, and
speed brake positions.
80
h. Examples on charts as described in 3.4.5.2.11a.
i. Chart data basis as described in 3.4.4.
j. Date of the flight manual in which the data first appeared.
3.4.5.2.11 Examples on charts. In graphical charts where reading is not obvious, the chart
shall contain examples in either of the following acceptable methods:
a. A miniature simplified reproduction of the chart shall be included and located

in the upper part of the title block, at the top of the page, and shall be placed
so that it does not interfere with the bordered title. Baselines, parameters,
guidelines, dash lines, and arrowheads shall be used sparingly to provide the
example desired without including grid patterns and numerals (see Figure 6).
b. An example shall be included on the first of each of the various types of

charts using a dashed line and following the values used in the sample
problems included in the text. The problem shall be selected so that the
dashed lines of the example will remain clear of the chart area normally
used.
3.4.6 General information charts. Charts presenting general information, not specifically
based on aircraft or engine data for the applicable aircraft (such as density altitude or
temperature conversion), shall not include any reference to a specific aircraft, engine, date,
or data base.
3.4.7 Description of charts. A description of all charts, including their functions, all
methods of use, definitions and limitations, shall be provided. This description shall be
given from the aircraft performance viewpoint and shall avoid duplication of information
contained in any other section of the manual.
3.4.8 Sample problems for charts. The text in each section preceding the performance data
charts shall contain sample problems describing the use of each different chart with a
complete discussion of each problem.
3.4.9 Sample charts. Where doubt exists as to the exact format desired for a particular
chart the acquiring activity shall be requested to supply examples. These examples may be
in the form of a flight manual or specially prepared sketches.
3.4.10 Performance data charts and text. The performance data charts and text shall be
arranged as shown below. Data for additional aircraft or engine configurations not
accounted for by a drag index format shall be included. Additional parts may be added to
present data on special performance modes, for example, air refueling or combat
performance. The criteria for calculating performance data shall be derived using MIL-
81
HDBK-1793 as a guide. The following charts shall be provided:
Part 1 - Introduction
Part 2 - Engine data
Part 3 - Takeoff
Part 4 - Climb
Part 5 - Cruise
Part 6 - Endurance
Part 7 - Descent
Part 8 - Approach and landing
Part 9 - Mission planning
3.4.10.1 Part 1 - Introduction.
3.4.10.1.1 Content and arrangement.
3.4.10.1.1.1 Table of contents. A table of contents shall be prepared in accordance with

3.3.2.4.1 and 3.3.2.
3.4.10.1.1.2 List of charts. A list of the charts identifying page number, figure number, and
title shall be included.
3.4.10.1.1.3 Introductory text. This paragraph shall present a brief summary of data basis
used to prepare charts. Applicable conditions plus any other information relative to the use
of the charts shall be provided. Explanations and example problems shall be included in
the introductory text for the charts and tables specified in the contract. If the performance
data is published as a separate manual/appendix, this paragraph shall include a statement
that all charts contained in the performance data are for specific aircraft model, engine
type/model, carburetor, and propeller designation, as applicable. A reference to Section V,
engine limitations for restrictions on alternate fuels shall be provided (see 3.3.7.5).
3.4.10.1.1.4 Chart explanation. Charts as prescribed below shall be prepared. Two or

more of these requirements may be combined into a single chart if this would enhance or
simplify the presentation without degrading the output data. The following charts shall be
included:
82
a. Drag number table.
b. Drag due to asymmetric loading.
c. Pitot static installation correction.
d. Compressibility correction to CAS.
e. Temperature correction for compressibility.
f. Mach number correction.
g. True mach number (TMN) - CAS/IAS conversion.
h. True mach number - true airspeed (TAS) conversion.
i. Temperature conversion.
j. Angle of attack.
k. Aircraft gross weight and CG position.
l. Standard charts and tables.
m. Additional charts.
3.4.10.1.1.4.1 Drag number table. The table for drag numbers shall present drag numbers
and weight data for all external items (stores, tanks, racks, and pylons) approved for
loading on a particular station. The initial entry shall be a drag number for the clean
aircraft and shall present a typical operating weight, weight of internal usable fuel, and (if
applicable) weight of internally carried ammunition as mission planning data. Each
authorized external item shall have a drag number assigned dependent upon its
aerodynamic characteristics and location on the aircraft. Correction factors in the form of
drag numbers shall be presented to account for interference between stores on any given
station and between stores mounted on different stations. Unless otherwise specified by
the acquiring activity, the method of accounting for interference shall be as shown in the
following examples (see 6.2):
a. Drag numbers for stores shall be totaled in one table and include interference
effects.
b. For aircraft that can accept multiple or triple ejector racks, a drag number
per store shall be assigned equal to the total drag number including
interference for a full rack divided by the total number of stores per rack, i.e.,
83
six for a multiple ejection rack.
c. Drag number for all developing systems shall be presented in non-

dimensional numbers such as CD X 104. For revisions to existing systems, if
the drag number basis is different from that described above, it shall be
defined prior to the drag number table.
d. The drag index number is a summation of the store drag numbers. Scaling of
drag numbers should result in a total drag number equal to or less than 100
units.
3.4.10.1.1.4.2 Drag due to asymmetric loading chart. This chart shall plot incremental
drag numbers versus net asymmetric load for various mach numbers and pressure
altitudes.
3.4.10.1.1.4.3 Pitot static installation correction. If correction is more than ±2 knots

airspeed or ±100 feet pressure altitude, the following charts for the installation correction
shall be furnished. (Corrections up to a magnitude of ±2 knots airspeed or ±100 feet
pressure altitude may be shown in tabulations.)
a. The chart for airspeed installation correction shall plot equivalent airspeed
(EAS) versus CAS [IAS corrected for instrument error] or IAS versus
correction to EAS. For high speed flights, the airspeed correction may be a
plot of mach position correction versus indicated mach. Parameters shall be
included for normal operating weights and for all normal configurations such
as full flaps and gear down, and flaps and gear up, for both in ground effect
(IGE) and out of ground effect (OGE). Text shall include an explanation of
the conversion from IAS to TAS and the statement: "Where the symbol IAS is
used on performance charts, mechanical error is assumed to be zero."
b. The chart for altimeter correction shall be a plot of altimeter position error
correction to be added to pressure altitude versus CAS/IAS with pressure
altitude parameters, from sea level to service ceiling and gross weight
parameters, for all normal configurations such as full flaps and gear down.
For aircraft whose airspeed correction data is in terms of mach number, the
altitude position correction shall be a chart showing altitude or altitude
correction versus mach number. The data shall include ground effects and
the curves shall be similar to those for airspeed corrections.
3.4.10.1.1.4.4 Compressibility correction to CAS chart. This chart shall be a plot of CAS
versus CAS or CAS versus compressibility correction with parameters of altitude.
3.4.10.1.1.4.5 Temperature correction for compressibility chart. This chart shall be a plot
of CAS/IAS versus air temperature with parameters of pressure altitude and IOAT. An
84
additional grid may be added to determine temperature variation from standard. For
aircraft with mach indicators, the chart shall be a plot of IOAT versus air temperature with
the parameters of mach number. The recovery factor used shall be noted on each chart.
3.4.10.1.1.4.6 Mach number correction chart. This chart shall be a plot of indicated mach
versus true mach with parameters of pressure altitude.
3.4.10.1.1.4.7 True mach number - CAS/IAS conversion chart. This chart shall be a plot of
true mach number versus CAS/IAS with parameters of pressure altitude.
3.4.10.1.1.4.8 True mach number - TAS conversion chart. The requirement for TMN - TAS
conversion will entail the development of two charts. For mission planning, the chart shall
be a plot of TAS versus TMN with parameters of pressure altitude. For in-flight use, this
chart shall be a plot of TAS versus TMN with parameters of air temperature.
3.4.10.1.1.4.9 Temperature conversion chart. This chart shall be a plot of degrees

Fahrenheit (°F) versus degrees Centigrade (°C).
3.4.10.1.1.4.10 Angle of attack chart. This chart shall plot CAS/IAS versus indicated AOA
(units)and fuselage AOA (degrees) with parameters of gross weight. Separate charts shall
be provided for various flap settings as required.
3.4.10.1.1.4.11 Aircraft gross weight and CG position chart. This chart shall plot the
change in aircraft gross weight and CG from a basic configuration for various store weights
on the store positions (see 3.4.5.2.7.9). A note shall be added to refer to the aircraft weight
and balance handbook (see TO 1-1B-50). This chart is required for aircraft having charts
with CG corrections and may be used by flight crews when the weight and balance manual
is not available. Contractor format, approved by the acquiring activity, is acceptable (see
6.2).
3.4.10.1.1.4.12 Standard charts and tables. When standard charts and tables are utilized,
only the portion that is applicable to the specific aircraft shall be presented. Standard
charts and tables shall consist of the following and will be provided by the acquiring
activity:
a. U.S. Standard Atmosphere Table (see 3.4.4.1).
b. Density altitude chart.
c. Density altitude tables, density altitude versus (1//F) each 100 feet (ft).
d. Altitude pressure table, inches Mercury (Hg) versus feet.
e. Airspeed conversion.
85
f. Standard units conversion charts.
g. Fuel density/weight versus temperature.
3.4.10.1.1.5 Additional charts. Any charts peculiar to certain aircraft shall be included.
3.4.10.2 Part 2 - Engine data.
3.4.10.2.1.1 Table of contents (see 3.4.10.1.1.1).
3.4.10.2.1.2 List of charts (see 3.4.10.1.1.2).
3.4.10.2.1.3 Introductory text (see 3.4.10.1.1.3).
3.4.10.2.1.4 Chart explanation. Explanations and sample problems shall be given for the
charts shown below. Two or more requirements may be combined into a single chart if this
would enhance or simplify the presentation without degrading the output data. The
following charts shall be provided:
a. Maximum power available for takeoff for all types of engines.
b. EPR, core speed, or fan speed (turbo engines).
c. Engine operating limits (reciprocating engines).
d. Power available in-flight.
e. Fuel flow.
f. Torque and fuel flow correction for air bleed on.
g. Additional charts.
3.4.10.2.1.4.1 Maximum power available for takeoff for all types of engines.
a. Maximum power prediction reciprocating engines. This chart shall be

applicable to reciprocating engines that have a takeoff manifold pressure
limit and torque/brake mean effective pressure (BMEP) limit. It shall be
plotted by brake horsepower (BHP) and torque available, wet and dry, low
and high blower, military or maximum continuous power, or standard and
alternate grade fuel (see 3.3.7.5). It is a plot of maximum BHP and torque
available for takeoff versus pressure altitude with parameters of carburetor
86
air temperature. Correction plots for manifold pressure in inches Hg, not to
exceed maximum BHP and dew point in °F shall be attached (see 6.10).
Subscales for predicted torque and minimum torque (normally 95 percent of
predicted torque) shall be shown on the BHP grid.
b. Maximum power (torque or thrust) available turbofan/turboprop engines.

This chart shall be a plot of torque pressure or thrust available for takeoff at
the static condition with normal air conditioning and pressurization bleed
versus air temperature with parameters of pressure altitude. A standard-day
temperature line shall be superimposed on the chart. Tabulated corrections
or correction charts for ram effects and effects of air bleed, on and off, shall be
furnished. Subscales for predicted torque and minimum acceptable torque
shall be shown on the BHP grid.
3.4.10.2.1.4.2 EPR, core speed or fan speed (turbofan engines) chart. This chart shall be
used to present the maximum setting for takeoff with and without bleed extraction and
missed approach setting. It is a plot of power available for takeoff and missed approach
versus air temperatures with parameters for pressure altitude.
3.4.10.2.1.4.3 Engine operating limits (reciprocating engines) chart. This chart shall be a
plot of engine BHP versus altitude for constant RPM with dashed lines of constant manifold
pressure superimposed and shall not include ram. Regions of blower operation shall be
noted.
3.4.10.2.1.4.4 Power schedule (reciprocating engines) chart. This chart shall consist of
plots of BHP versus manifold pressure and engine RPM, BMEP, or torque pounds per
square inch for low and high blower. Limit lines shall be used to indicate regions such as
turbo surge, closed waste gate, propeller vibration, and BMEP. A correction for variations
in carburetor air temperature shall be included.
3.4.10.2.1.4.5 Power (torque or thrust) available in-flight (turboprop engines) chart. This
chart shall be constructed to show torque versus pressure altitude with parameters of knots
calibrated airspeed (KCAS), air temperature, and turbine inlet temperature.
3.4.10.2.1.4.6 Fuel flow chart. The chart shall be prepared as follows:
a. For reciprocating engines, the chart shall be a plot of fuel flow per engine
versus BHP per engine for operation in accordance with the recommended
power schedule. Parameters of altitude and RPM shall be included if these
factors appreciably alter the fuel flow.
b. For jet engines, the chart shall be a plot of fuel flow per engine versus EPR
core speed or fan speed with parameters of TMN, air temperature, and
pressure altitude. The TMN and altitude shall cover the operational range of
87
the aircraft. Structural, power, or aerodynamic limits shall be shown.
3.4.10.2.1.4.7 Torque and fuel flow correction for air bleed on chart. The charts for in flight
correction for air bleed on shall be prepared as follows (see 3.4.10.2.1.4.1b):
a. The chart for torque shall be a plot of torque with normal air conditioning
and pressurization bleed versus torque or thrust with air bleed systems on
with parameters of pressure altitude.
b. The chart for fuel flow shall be a plot of fuel flow with normal air conditioning
and pressurization bleed versus fuel flow with air bleed systems on with
parameters of pressure altitude.
3.4.10.2.1.5 Additional charts. Any charts peculiar to certain aircraft such as reverse
thrust limiter and low speed compressor RPM shall be furnished.
3.4.10.3 Part 3 - Takeoff.
3.4.10.3.1.3 Introductory text. In addition to the requirements of 3.4.10.1.1.3 the following

shall be included:
3.4.10.3.1.3.1 Monitoring aircraft performance during takeoff. (see 6.11). The presentation
requirements outlined for this section shall be followed to the extent practical based on the
aircraft and currently established procedures (see 3.3.4.1.18).
3.4.10.3.1.3.2 Takeoff performance data. The following takeoff performance data

explanations shall be included:
a. Takeoff speed shall be the speed at which the main gear leaves the ground
(i.e., liftoff).
b. Climbout speed shall be the minimum speed for obstacle clearance.
c. Takeoff ground run shall be the distance in feet to takeoff speed.
d. Rotation speed shall be the speed at which rotation from the three point
attitude to the takeoff attitude is initiated by applying back pressure to the
control stick or column.
88
e. Maximum braking speed shall be the highest speed from which the aircraft
can be brought to a stop without exceeding the maximum design capability of
the brakes.
f. Minimum afterburner blowout speed shall be the minimum speed from which
a safe takeoff can be continued in the remaining runway length, should
failure occur.
g. Critical engine failure speed shall be the speed at which the most critical
engine can fail and the same distance is required to either continue the
takeoff or stop the aircraft.
h. Critical field length shall be the total length of the runway required to
accelerate with all engines to critical engine failure speed, experience a
critical failure, and then continue to takeoff or stop (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.9).
i. Refusal speed shall be the maximum speed with normal acceleration where a
stop can be completed while on the runway.
j. Refusal distance shall be the distance required to accelerate to the refusal

speed with normal acceleration.
k. Minimum go speed shall be the higher of ground minimum control speed and
the minimum speed at which an aircraft can experience a failure of the most
critical engine and still takeoff under existing conditions of temperature,
pressure altitude, gross weight and runway remaining. The data are based
on an engine failure occurring at the minimum go speed and allows for a 3
second decision period with the remaining engines operating at the initial
thrust setting.
l. Maximum abort speed shall be the maximum speed at which an abort can be
started and the aircraft stopped within the remaining runway length.
Maximum abort speed shall be the lowest of the maximum braking speed,
refusal speed, and rotation speed. Allowances included in this data are based
on a 3 second decision period (with engines operating at initial thrust setting)
and a 3 second period to accomplish abort procedures.
m. Air minimum control speed shall be the minimum airborne speed at which
the engine most critical to directional control can fail, with the remaining
engine(s) operating at takeoff thrust and a straight flight path at that speed
can be maintained with full rudder deflection and no more than 75 percent of
the available aileron control, or 5° of bank into the operating engine(s).
n. Ground minimum control speed shall be the minimum speed during takeoff
89
run at which the engine most critical to directional control can fail with the
remaining engine(s) operating at takeoff thrust and a straight path on the
runway can be achieved and maintained using the elevator, aileron, rudder
controls and nose wheel steering as required.
o. Acceleration checks are made to determine if the acceleration of the aircraft

is adequate to assure a safe takeoff. (Unless otherwise specified by the
acquiring activity, the speed/distance, speed/time and charted power setting
(EPR or N1)/speed are three acceptable methods covered in this specification
(see 6.2)).
p. Acceleration speed check shall be made at some point prior to refusal speed
and shall be the minimum speed allowable at the acceleration speed check
time or distance. A charted EPR or power check up to computed decision
speed (S1) may be used. This procedure requires an abort if any engine falls
below charted EPR or power prior to S1. On unmarked runways the
acceleration check speed is an even 10 knot increment not less than 5 knots
and not more than 15 knots below refusal or maximum abort speed. On
marked runways the acceleration check shall always be made at some point
prior to refusal speed. (For cargo/transport type aircraft the acceleration
check shall be made at the first 1,000 foot marker at least 500 feet but no
more than 1,500 feet, prior to refusal distance. For any other type aircraft
the acceleration check shall be made at preselected distances consistent with
aircraft performance and command requirements).
q. Acceleration check speed tolerance for single-engine aircraft shall be a

reduction in speed below normal acceleration speed and is dependent on the
amount of excess runway available beyond normal takeoff distance. (For
multi-engine aircraft it is dependent on the amount of excess runway
available beyond critical field length. The tolerance shall be limited to a
maximum (to be defined by the acquiring activity) when the acceleration
check is made at a marker (see 6.2)).
r. Commitment speed shall be the speed at which the pilot becomes committed
to continue the takeoff. The takeoff run should be aborted if an emergency
occurs before commitment speed.
s. Climb gradient is a ratio expressed in percent and defined as:
Vertical Height (climb) X 100

Climb Gradient =
Horizontal Distance (climb)
90
3.4.10.3.1.3.3 Terminology applicable to winds. The terms applicable to winds are shown
in paragraphs 3.4.10.3.1.3.3.1 and 3.4.10.3.1.3.3.2 and shall be included in the manual.
Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring activity, the "Wind Summary Sample Table"
(see Table 1) shall be included (see 6.2) based on the following explanations:
a. Steady wind value shall be reported steady wind.
b. Gust increment shall be reported wind in excess of steady wind value.
c. Headwind component is the effective wind parallel to the runway,

determined from the steady wind value plus the gust increment and blowing
in the direction opposite of takeoff.
d. Tailwind component is the effective wind parallel to the runway, determined

from the steady wind value plus the gust increment and blowing in the
direction of takeoff.
e. Crosswind component is the effective wind 90° across the runway,

determined from the steady wind value plus the gust increment.
3.4.10.3.1.3.3.1 Wind direction and velocity. Winds are measured at some fixed point.
However, if the airfield is located in an area of variable terrain, the possibility exists that
wind velocity and direction will vary over portions of the airfield. Likewise, wind shear can
result with varying winds.
3.4.10.3.1.3.3.2 Accounting for wind. The entire runway (100 percent) will be used in
computing all maximum braking and time limit data. Accept the benefits of headwinds as
an increased safety margin, i.e., consider the use of headwind only when necessary for
mission accomplishment. When it is necessary to use the wind, it may be decided to take
only
91
TABLE I. Wind summary sample table.
Type of Wind How to Obtain Component Use of Wind Component
Headwind Enter wind component chart Apply 100% of runway

with steady wind value to obtain component to acceleration
runway component. check and ground run
distances.
Apply 50% of runway

component to all takeoff and
landing distances except for
acceleration check.
Do not apply headwinds for

terrain clearance.
Tailwind Enter wind component chart Apply 100% of runway

with steady wind value plus the component to acceleration
gust increment to obtain check and ground run
runway component. distances.
Apply 150% of runway

component to all takeoff and
landing distances except for
acceleration check.
Apply 150% of runway

component for terrain
clearance.
Crosswind Enter wind component chart Adjust ground minimum

with steady wind value plus the control speed for 100% of
gust increment to obtain crosswind component. 1/
crosswind.
Check necessity of increased
takeoff and landing speeds.
Gusts Reported wind in excess of Increase takeoff speed,

steady value equals gust threshold speed, and landing
increment. speed by the full gust
increment not to exceed ______
knots. 2/
1/ This statement shall be included only when the manual contains a ground minimum control speed chart with
speeds that require correction for crosswinds.
2/ This value will be provided by the acquiring activity (see 6.2).
92
partial benefit. In such a case it is recommended that 50 percent of the headwind

component and 150 percent of the tailwind component be applied (except acceleration
check). The following conditions shall be considered in accounting for wind:
a. No corrections for headwind should be made to any distance or speed except

when computing acceleration checks.
b. Apply tailwinds.
c. Apply the crosswind and headwind gust increment to the takeoff speed, final
approach speed, threshold speed and landing speed. All distances and speeds
except takeoff speed and ground minimum control speed shall be corrected for
steady state headwinds or tailwinds during takeoff planning and the
crosswind component and headwind gust increment shall be applied to
takeoff speed, threshold speed and landing speed.
3.4.10.3.1.4 Takeoff chart presentation. There are two acceptable chart presentations for
takeoff data. Preferred is the takeoff factor which includes a separate chart or charts to
combine the air temperature, pressure altitude, and engine thrust variables into a takeoff
factor which is then used to enter each of the various takeoff data charts. Also acceptable is
the basic presentation which includes all variables on each of the various takeoff data
charts (see 3.3.4.1.18).
3.4.10.3.1.4.1 Takeoff chart parameters. Takeoff data such as ground run and critical field
length shall be presented for altitudes from -2,000 to +16,000 feet pressure altitude (not to
exceed the performance capability of less than +16,000 feet) and for air temperature. Any
one particular parameter, such as takeoff ground run, shall be presented. Up to three
separate charts may be used to cover segments of altitude.
3.4.10.3.1.4.2 Takeoff graphic illustrations. Graphic illustrations with explanatory text

shall be provided for the following runway critical field relationship. These illustrations are
plots of distance versus runway available with parameters of acceleration, stopping
distance, VMCG, VCEF, VR, VTO, and applicable terms.
a. Runway available equal to critical field length.
b. Runway less than critical field length.
c. Runway longer than critical field length.
3.4.10.3.1.5 Chart explanation. Explanations and example problems shall be given for the
charts shown below. Two or more of these requirements may be combined into a single
chart if this would enhance or simplify the presentation without degrading the output data.
The following charts shall be included:
93
a. Takeoff factor/thrust factor.
b. Takeoff gross weight limit.
c. Minimum safe single-engine takeoff speed.
d. Takeoff and landing crosswind.
e. Takeoff ground run.
f. Reduced power/thrust takeoff.
g. Assist takeoff ignition time.
h. Total obstacle clearance distance.
i. Critical field length.
j. Refusal speed/critical engine failure speed.
k. Minimum afterburner blowout speed.
l. Minimum go speed.
m. Maximum abort speed.
n. Takeoff speed.
o. Acceleration check.
p. Ground minimum control speed.
q. Air minimum control speed.
r. Climbout factor.
s. Climbout flight path.
t. Maximum braking speed.
u. Basic takeoff charts.
v. Time, distance, and fuel to climb initiation.
w. Additional charts.
94
3.4.10.3.1.5.1 Takeoff factors/thrust factors. Takeoff and thrust factors reference numbers
shall be utilized on takeoff data charts and are determined from air temperature, pressure
altitude, and engine thrust variables.
3.4.10.3.1.5.1.1 Takeoff factors for reciprocating engine aircraft. The takeoff factor shall be
determined from the parameters of BMEP or torque pressure and density altitude. It is
recommended that the minimum BMEP or torque pressure be used to determine the takeoff
factor.
3.4.10.3.1.5.1.2 Takeoff factors for turbine powered aircraft. The takeoff factor shall be
determined from the parameters of air temperature and pressure altitude with normal
bleed (air condition and pressurization) on. A standard-day temperature line may be
superimposed on the pressure altitude lines. Corrections to the takeoff factor for the effects
of air bleed on, air bleed off, partial afterburner, military thrust, screens retracted, and
anti-ice on shall be provided.
3.4.10.3.1.5.1.3 Takeoff factors for turboprop aircraft. Determining the takeoff factor is the
same as 3.4.10.3.1.5.1.2 except that a correction chart for air bleed on and air bleed off shall
be furnished.
3.4.10.3.1.5.1.4 Takeoff factors/thrust factors for turbine powered aircraft with flat rated
engines. The thrust factor shall be determined from the parameters of EPR and pressure
altitude. Performance losses due to bleed system operation are accounted for by the
reduced EPR used to enter the chart. The takeoff factor is determined from the thrust
factor and the parameters of air temperature and pressure altitude. Both a thrust factor
and a takeoff factor are normally used for flat rated turbine engines.
3.4.10.3.1.5.2 Takeoff gross weight limit chart. There are two acceptable chart
presentations. One plots gross weight versus takeoff/thrust factor with parameters of rate
of climb for 100 through 500 feet per minute with a correction grid for air temperature
variation from standard-day. The other presentation provides two charts. The first chart
plots gross weight versus takeoff/thrust factor with parameters of percent gradient. The
second chart plots rate of climb versus gross weight with parameters of percent gradient
and altitude. Rules for computation: The rate of climb slope shall be based on maximum
power with the most critical engine inoperative, OGE, gear up/flaps set for takeoff,
propeller feathered (when applicable), at climbout speed (constant CAS/IAS). Rate of climb
based on flight tests shall be obtainable at speeds recommended for climbout but not less
than b. and c. below. The climbout speed for estimated data shall not be less than the
following:
a. One hundred twenty percent of 1G power-off stall speed.
b. Air minimum control speed.
c. Five knots above the speed for zero rate of climb.
95
3.4.10.3.1.5.3 Minimum safe single-engine takeoff speed chart. This chart shall depict the
single-engine speed required to attain a rate of climb of 100 feet per minute with maximum
thrust OGE in the takeoff configuration. This is a plot of single-engine takeoff speed versus
takeoff factor with parameters of gross weight, CG, temperature, and any other variables
required. This chart shall be required for two-engine aircraft whenever the manual does
not contain a takeoff gross weight limit chart (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.2) or a critical field length
chart (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.9). Takeoff speeds based on flight tests shall meet the criteria
specified in b. and c. below. The takeoff speed for estimated data shall be not less than
those determined by the following criteria:
a. Lift coefficient not exceeding 110 percent of 1G power-off stall speed.
b. Air minimum control speed.
c. Five knots above the speed for zero rate of climb.
3.4.10.3.1.5.4 Takeoff and landing crosswind chart. This chart shall present wind
direction of 0° to 90° in 5° increments and wind velocity of 0 to 60 knots in 5 knot
increments. Minimum touchdown or rotation speed shall be included on the chart and shall
present the minimum speed for various crosswinds at maximum slope angle (with
maximum or near maximum rudder deflection). The crosswind chart is based on the
following formula:
Where TAS is true airspeed, V is velocity of wind, 2 is the angle between the wind and the
flight path of the aircraft, and $max is the maximum angle of sideslip an aircraft is
authorized at the TAS in question. Influencing factors that shall be considered peculiar to
a particular aircraft and may appreciably influence sideslip angle are as shown below:
a. Runway altitudes and temperatures.
b. Aircraft CG position.
c. External store configuration.
d. Directional ground control for various runway conditions and ground roll
limitations.
e. Safety factor in directional control power to allow some control for turbulence
and maneuvering (Assume maximum authorized rudder for crosswind is 80
percent of $max). The above factors should be considered with the intent to
provide the maximum safe crosswind capability for each existing condition
96
rather than considering the worst case. Considering all items may require
several charts to provide correction factors before finally reading the
crosswind chart.
3.4.10.3.1.5.4.1 Crosswind landing gear position chart. This chart shall present crosswind
gear setting versus crosswind with parameters of gross weight.
3.4.10.3.1.5.5 Takeoff ground run charts. These charts shall be a plot of the takeoff factor
versus ground run with parameters of gross weight (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2c.). Graphical data
shall be presented for each recommended takeoff flap setting. Lines of constant increase in
takeoff speed from the normal schedule following an engine failure to meet the 100 feet per
minute minimum rate of climb shall be included if applicable. If assist devices are a part of
the standard equipment, separate charts shall be prepared to indicate takeoff ground run
with assist device (see 3.3.3.2.5). A chart for one engine inoperative from brake release
shall be required for all aircraft that have three or more engines. When requested by the
acquiring activity, charts shall be furnished for zero flap settings and alternate fuel grades
(see 6.2). Rules for computation are shown below:
a. Distance for estimated data shall be based on takeoff speeds for the takeoff
configuration IGE not less than those determined by the following criteria:
(1) Lift coefficient not exceeding 110 percent of 1G power-off stall speed.
(2) Lift coefficient based on maximum AOA attainable with the main
landing gear oleo struts positioned for the static condition.
(3) Minimum speed at which the aircraft has a rate of climb of 100 feet
per minute OGE with all engines operating, including the effect of
increased drag due to gear retraction.
(4) Air minimum control speed.
b. Distances shall be for hard surfaces using a roll resistance of 0.025. When
requested by the acquiring activity, coefficients for other types of surfaces
shall be furnished (see 6.2).
c. Distances based on flight tests shall be obtainable at speeds recommended for

normal operation but not less than the preceding criteria specified in a.(2),
(3), & (4).
d. When requested by the acquiring activity, data for other than normal
operation such as maximum effort shall be based on flight tests (see 6.2).
3.4.10.3.1.5.5.1 Water takeoff run for amphibian aircraft charts. Charts of takeoff for
water and ground runs shall be provided for amphibian aircraft.
97
3.4.10.3.1.5.6 Reduced power/thrust takeoff charts. When requested by the acquiring

activity, charts for takeoff runs for reduced power/thrust shall be provided (see 6.2).
3.4.10.3.1.5.7 Assist takeoff ignition time chart. When specified, this chart shall be a plot
of takeoff factor versus ignition time with parameters of gross weight. A wind correction
grid shall be included (see 6.2).
3.4.10.3.1.5.8 Total obstacle clearance distance charts. This chart shall be a plot of
obstacle height from zero to two hundred feet versus total obstacle clearance distance with
parameters of ground run distance. This chart shall be required for single-engine aircraft.
3.4.10.3.1.5.9 Critical field length chart. This chart shall be similar to the chart for takeoff
ground run (see 3.4.10.3.1.1.5). For multi-engine aircraft, lines of constant increase in
takeoff speed from the normal schedule with all engines operating to meet the 100 feet per
minute minimum rate of climb potential with one engine inoperative shall be included.
Aircraft equipped with drag chutes shall have charts with and without drag chute deployed.
Aircraft equipped with reverse thrust devices shall have charts with and without reverse
thrust. The critical field length shall be based on the following rules (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2h.):
a. At engine failure speed the aircraft continues to accelerate for 3 seconds with
remaining engines at takeoff thrust and zero thrust on the inoperative
engine.
b. At the end of the three second acceleration time, thrust on all engines is
reduced to idle, brakes applied, and deceleration devices deployed.
c. Sufficient time allowed for deployment of the deceleration device or for

reverse thrust to build up before including its effect on deceleration.
NOTE
On multi-engine aircraft, reverse thrust shall not be applied in a

manner that will induce yawing moments.
d. Effective tire to runway braking coefficient of friction for dry runway shall
not exceed 0.3 for estimated data.
e. Critical engine failure speed shall not be less than the ground minimum
control speed.
3.4.10.3.1.5.10 Refusal speed/critical engine failure speed chart. This chart shall be a plot
of takeoff factor versus refusal/critical engine failure speed with parameters of runway
length available and gross weight (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2g. and i.). A takeoff speed line shall be
superimposed on the gross weight lines, to plot gross weight versus speed. Aircraft
equipped with reverse thrust devices shall have refusal speed charts both with and without
98
reverse thrust. Refusal speeds and critical engine failure speeds shall be based on the same
rules specified for the chart for critical field length chart (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.9).
3.4.10.3.1.5.11 Minimum afterburner blowout speed chart. This chart shall plot minimum
afterburner blowout speed (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2f) versus takeoff factor for runway length and
gross weight parameters.
3.4.10.3.1.5.12 Minimum go speed chart. This chart shall plot thrust factor versus
minimum go speed (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2k) with parameters of runway length and gross
weight.
3.4.10.3.1.5.13 Maximum abort speed chart. This chart shall plot thrust factor versus
maximum abort speed (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2l) with parameters of runway length and gross
weight corrected for RCR. Aircraft equipped with drag chutes shall have maximum abort
speed both with and without drag chutes (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.9).
3.4.10.3.1.5.14 Takeoff speeds chart. This chart shall be a plot of gross weight versus
speed (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2a.). All speeds such as takeoff, rotation, flaps up, or climbout may
be plotted on the same chart. Aircraft using speed schedules for various CG positions shall
have separate charts for each of the speeds with parameters of CG in percent mean
aerodynamic chord (MAC).
3.4.10.3.1.5.15 Acceleration check chart. At least one of the following charts shall be
provided for acceleration check planning. The charts shall provide the information
necessary to perform an acceleration check by at least one of the three allowable methods;
speed/distance, speed/time, or power setting (EPR or N1)/speed. A method to correct takeoff
distance and acceleration check distance or time shall be provided for rolling takeoffs or
"rolling EPR" takeoffs. If speed/distance information is provided, at least one other method
shall be included for use on unmarked runways.
3.4.10.3.1.5.15.1 Acceleration check speed chart. This chart shall be a plot of acceleration
check speed versus takeoff factor with gross weight and acceleration check time and/or
distance parameters. Wind and slope corrections shall be provided.
3.4.10.3.1.5.15.2 Acceleration check time chart. This chart shall be a plot of acceleration
check time versus takeoff factor with gross weight and acceleration check speed
parameters.
3.4.10.3.1.5.15.3 Power setting check chart. Takeoff power setting (EPR or N1) charts in
Part 2 - Engine Data, may be used for the power setting/speed method.
3.4.10.3.1.5.16 Ground minimum control speed chart. This chart shall be a plot of thrust
factor versus CAS/IAS with parameters of RCR and crosswind (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2n). The
following information shall be included in the text: VMCG must be equal to or less than VR.
The charts for control of the aircraft during takeoff run following sudden loss of thrust from
99
the most critical engine shall allow the pilot to maintain a straight path on the runway
with no more than a deviation of 30 feet from the path originally intended with rudder
forces not to exceed 180 pounds. The following criteria shall also apply:
a. Takeoff thrust can be maintained on the operative engine(s).
b. For a dry runway, control can be maintained by elevator, aileron, rudder

controls, and nose wheel steering.
c. For wet and icy runways, control can be maintained by elevator, aileron, and
rudder controls. No credit will be given for nose wheel steering, unless such
control is demonstrated by flight test.
d. The aircraft is trimmed for takeoff.
e. CG is in the most unfavorable position.
f. Automatic devices which operate in the event of a thrust failure may be used.
g. The aircraft motion, following sudden asymmetrical loss of thrust, shall be

such that dangerous conditions can be avoided. A realistic time delay of 1
second can be considered.
h. Some runways may have runway crowns up to 1.5 percent transverse

gradient and can significantly effect the ground minimum control speed of
the aircraft. (The chart format is based on a yawing moment balance criteria.
At low RCR, the aircraft may be side force limited and will require a different
chart format that includes RCR, crosswind and gross weight variables. The
acquiring activity shall determine the need for this additional chart (see 6.2)).
3.4.10.3.1.5.17 Air minimum control speed chart. The chart for air minimum control speed
IGE and OGE, gear down, and takeoff flap setting for one and two engines inoperative,
shall be a plot of air temperature, °C versus CAS/IAS in knots with parameters of pressure
altitude (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2m.). A standard-day temperature line may be superimposed
across the altitude lines. For aircraft equipped with jet engines, the chart shall be a plot of
gross weight versus airspeed with parameters of thrust factor. The chart shall also be
based on the ability to achieve straight flight throughout the climbout following sudden
asymmetric loss of thrust from the most critical engine. In addition to the criteria in
3.4.10.3.1.5.16 a, d, e, f, and g, the following shall also be included:
a. The rudder pedal force required to maintain straight flight with asymmetric
thrust shall not exceed 180 pounds.
b. Aileron control shall not exceed either the force limit recommended in MIL-
HDBK-1797, or 75 percent of the available aileron control.
100
c. Bank. Angle shall not exceed 5° from the inoperative engine or as limited by
step b. above.
3.4.10.3.1.5.18 Climbout factor chart. This chart shall be a plot of takeoff/thrust factor
versus climbout factor with the parameters of takeoff gross weight (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2b.).
The climbout factor shall be a reference number utilized on the climbout flight path charts
to simplify determination of climbout performance. Climbout factor numbers shall be
scaled to avoid using them for takeoff or thrust factors. Data for all engines operating and
one engine inoperative shall be included.
3.4.10.3.1.5.19 Climbout flight path chart. These charts shall be plots of vertical height
above takeoff point versus horizontal distance from brake release with the parameter of
climbout factor. All engines operating charts shall be constructed to a minimum of either
8,000 feet vertical height or 24 nautical miles horizontal distance. One engine inoperative
charts shall be a minimum of either 2,200 feet vertical height or 10 nautical miles
horizontal distance. The horizontal distance shall be in feet with a subscale in nautical
miles. Enlarged sections of these charts for close-in obstacles shall also be presented.
Correction grids (see 3.4.5.2.8) for tailwinds shall be included in the text for one engine
inoperative. The critical field length (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.9) portion of the total distance shown
is for a dry level runway; however, the critical field length is extended for other runway
conditions (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.16) or with an uphill slope (see 3.4.5.2.8.1). In determining the
corrected critical field length, a correction shall not be applied for headwind, but shall be
applied for tailwind. The charts for all engines operating, shall be based on all engines
accelerating from brake release to takeoff. Charts for one engine inoperative, shall be
based on all engines accelerating from brake release to critical engine failure speed and one
engine failing at critical engine failure speed to takeoff. Gear retraction shall be initiated
as soon as the aircraft is airborne and a positive rate of climb established. Climbout speeds
shall not be less than those shown on the takeoff gross weight limit chart (see
3.4.10.3.1.5.2).
3.4.10.3.1.5.20 Maximum braking speed chart. This chart shall plot maximum braking
speed versus gross weight for various parameters of pressure altitude and air temperature
(see 3.4.10.3.1.3.2e.). The chart shall be based on the maximum torque available with
proven efficiency level attainable from the skid control system. If no skid control system is
installed, 0.9 maximum torque as demonstrated for the maximum energy conditions of
MIL-W-5013 shall be used.
3.4.10.3.1.5.21 Basic takeoff chart. This chart shall include all variables necessary to
obtain takeoff data and shall be used when the takeoff factor is not used.
3.4.10.3.1.5.22 Time, distance, and fuel to climb initiation chart. This chart shall contain
plots of time, distance, and fuel from brake release to climb initiation versus takeoff factor
with parameters of gross weight and, if applicable, drag index. Tabulated values for ground
taxi and static military and maximum thrust fuel flows in pounds per minute shall be
included. Data shall normally be shown for maximum and military thrust with all engines
101
operating and maximum thrust with one engine inoperative.
3.4.10.3.1.5.23 Additional charts. Any charts peculiar to the takeoff operation of certain
aircraft, such as runway slope correction greater than 3 percent and takeoff stabilizer
setting, shall be included.
3.4.10.4 Part 4 - Climb.

shall be included.
3.4.10.4.1.3.1 Ceiling terminology. The terms applicable to ceilings are similar to those
used in MIL-HDBK-1793. All ceiling data shall be based on recommended climb speeds.
Any other ceiling terms shall be identified.
3.4.10.4.1.3.2 Climb terminology. All terms pertinent to climb shall be included along with
terms such as climb speeds, schedules, cruise ceilings, and performance ceilings.
3.4.10.4.1.3.3 Factors affecting climb performance. A discussion of the factors affecting

climb performance shall be presented (see 3.3.4.1.21). Various climb procedures, effect of
climb speed and drag index on rate of climb, engine cooling, use of cowl flaps, and effect of
temperature and corrections shall be discussed. The effect of an inoperative engine on
climb performance for multi-engine aircraft shall also be included (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.19).
The following charts shall be required:
a. Time, distance, and fuel
b. Speed
c. Ceiling
d. Additional charts
3.4.10.4.1.5 Chart format. Climb charts shall be presented as specified in 3.4.3. Charts
shall be presented for all engines operating and, if applicable, one and two engines
102
inoperative. Charts shall be based on maximum continuous power, military power, and/or
maximum power as required.
3.4.10.4.1.5.1 Time, distance, and fuel to climb chart. These charts shall be plots of gross
weight versus time, distance, or fuel with parameters of pressure altitude and drag index if
required. Influence lines showing the effect of decreasing weight during the climb shall be
included. A standard-day temperature correction grid shall be attached. The range of
altitudes shall be from sea level to the aircraft standard-day service ceiling. When
requested by the acquiring activity, additional ceiling lines shall be included. Charts shall
be based on the speed and power required in normal service. If climb is to be performed at
a constant calibrated airspeed and/or mach number, it shall be noted on the charts.
3.4.10.4.1.5.2 Climb speed chart. When climb charts are based on varying speed, climb
speed charts shall be provided. If climb speeds are different for all engines operating and
one and two engines inoperative, separate charts shall be furnished. These charts shall
plot KCAS/KIAS or TMN versus pressure altitude with parameters of gross weight and
drag index if required. Applicable ceiling lines shall be superimposed on the gross weight
curves. A standard-day temperature correction grid shall be attached (see 3.4.5.2.7.5).
3.4.10.4.1.5.3 Ceilings chart. This chart shall be a plot of gross weight versus altitude with
parameters of either rates of climb from zero to five hundred feet per minute in increments
of one hundred feet per minute or drag index. Rates of climb shall be based on the climb
speed schedule at the given weight and power setting. Separate charts shall be provided for
service ceiling, cruise ceiling, combat ceiling, and optimum cruise climb altitude. A
standard -day temperature correction grid shall be provided (see 3.4.5.2.7.5).
3.4.10.4.1.6 Additional charts. (see 3.4.10.1.1.5).
3.4.10.5 Part 5 - Cruise.
3.4.10.5.1.3 Introductory text. In addition to the requirements of 3.4.10.1.1.3, the following

shall be included.
3.4.10.5.1.3.1 Cruise terminology. The following terms applicable to cruise shall be used.
a. The airspeed for maximum range shall be the speed at which 100 percent of
the nautical miles per pound of fuel are attainable at a given weight and
altitude.
103
b. The airspeed for long range operation shall be the greater of the two speeds
at which 99 percent of the maximum nautical miles per pound of fuel are
attainable at a given weight and altitude.
c. The constant power cruise is a technique that consists of setting a power and
allowing airspeed to increase with weight reduction.
d. Constant speed/mach cruise shall be a technique that consists of maintaining

a preselected airspeed/mach at constant altitude by periodic reduction of
power.
e. Cruise climb is a technique that consists of maintaining a constant Weight to

Pressure Ratio (W/*) at recommended long range cruise mach/airspeed. This
is done by establishing the thrust for the desired speed and allowing the
aircraft to gain altitude as weight is decreased by fuel consumption. The
altitude flown, which shall not exceed cruise ceiling, is the optimum cruise
climb altitude and is the altitude at which maximum value of nautical miles
is obtained for each pound of fuel consumed.
f. The step climb cruise is a technique that is a compromise between constant

altitude cruise and cruise climb. It consists of flying at either long range
speed, maximum continuous power, or constant TAS/mach at a starting
altitude that approximates the optimum cruise climb altitude or cruise
ceiling. This altitude is then maintained until weight has decreased enough
to allow a 2,000 foot or 4,000 foot climb back to the optimum cruise altitude
or cruise ceiling.
3.4.10.5.1.3.2 Range terminology. Terms and factors affecting range data shall be
presented. The effects of airspeed, power settings, altitude, temperature, wind, gross
weight, external configuration, inoperative engine, fuel boil-off, and anti-icing bleed, are all
factors that could affect range performance.
charts below. Two or more of these requirements may be combined into a single chart if
this would enhance or simplify the presentation without degrading the output data. The
following charts shall be included:
a. Cruise climb
b. Optimum step climb
c. Specific range
d. Fuel flow
104
e. Range summary
f. Diversion range summary
g. Additional charts
3.4.10.5.1.5 Chart format. Cruise charts shall be presented as specified in 3.4.3. Charts
shall be presented for all engines operating and, if applicable, one and two engines
inoperative.
3.4.10.5.1.5.1 Cruise climb chart. This chart shall contain plots of altitude, specific range
(nautical air miles per pound of fuel burned), and mach number versus gross weight for
parameters of air temperature or drag index, as applicable. The plotted mach numbers and
altitudes shall provide the conditions to be flown to maximize the range of the aircraft. The
mach numbers shall be the long range cruise mach numbers. A standard-day temperature
correction grid (see 3.4.5.2.7.5) shall be provided for drag index format charts.
3.4.10.5.1.5.2 Optimum step climb chart. This chart shall contain plots of optimum step
climb range and flight time versus gross weight for parameters of drag index, if drag index
is required. A standard-day correction grid shall be supplied except as follows. If
temperature change has minimal effect on either parameter, a note stating this shall be
included and the temperature correction grid shall not be included. Climbs shall be
conducted at maximum continuous power (normal rated thrust). The applicable
mach/mach schedule shall be placed on the chart. If charts are separated for clarity, they
shall be placed on facing pages.
3.4.10.5.1.5.3 Specific range chart. These charts shall be prepared as stated below and
shall be provided as applicable.
a. Specific range charts in non-drag index format shall be a series of plots of

nautical air miles per pound of fuel burned (specific range) versus true
airspeed in knots true airspeed (KTAS) or true mach for parameters of gross
weight. A subscale of KCAS/KIAS shall be included under the KTAS scale
with influence lines defining the change in KCAS/KIAS for air temperature
variations from a standard-day temperature grid. Long range cruise speed
and maximum endurance airspeed curves shall be superimposed on the gross
weight curves. Where applicable, engine operating lines such as BHP,
torque, or fuel flow shall be included. Unless otherwise specified, separate
charts shall be prepared for altitudes from sea level to the cruise ceiling of
the aircraft in increments of 5,000 feet altitude and for all applicable
configurations (see 6.2). A note defining the percent change in specific range
with air temperature shall be included on the chart. A note defining the wind
correction method shall be included on the chart.
b. Specific range charts in drag index format shall consist of a series of charts.
105
Each chart shall consist of three pages of generalized fuel flow data for
obtaining specific range for variations in gross weight, pressure altitude, and
mach number/true airspeed. Each chart in the series shall contain data for a
different drag index. Page 1 of each chart shall be a plot of gross weight
versus a reference number which is some function of gross weight divided by
the pressure ratio (W/*) for parameters of pressure altitude. The second page
shall be a plot of mach number/true airspeed versus reference number for a
baseline of long range cruise speed. Influence curves shall be added to obtain
reference numbers at speeds other than long range cruise speed. A subscale
of KCAS/KIAS shall be included under the mach number/true airspeed scale
with influence lines defining the change in KCAS/KIAS for variations in air
temperature from standard-day. A note defining the percent change in
specific range with air temperature shall be included on this page. A note
defining wind correction method shall be included on this page. A maximum
endurance line shall be superimposed on the influence curves. The third
page shall be a plot of reference number versus specific range for parameters
of pressure altitude.
3.4.10.5.1.5.4 Fuel flow chart. This chart shall be a plot of fuel flow versus true mach
number for parameters of air temperature and specific range. Specific range data shall
cover the full spectrum of values available for the aircraft. No additional data is required
on this chart.
3.4.10.5.1.5.5 Range summary chart. This chart shall contain plots of constant
altitude/constant mach number range and flight time versus gross weight for parameters of
pressure altitude. A standard-day temperature correction grid shall be included unless
temperature has minimal effect on either parameter. If the temperature grid is not
included, a note so stating shall be included. The applicable mach number shall be placed
on the chart. If charts are separated for clarity, they shall be placed on facing pages.
3.4.10.5.1.5.6 Diversion range summary chart. The chart for diversion range summary
shall be a plot of fuel versus distance with parameters of altitude and shall show fuel
required to cruise short distances in the clean configuration of clean plus empty pylon
configuration, as applicable. Data shall be included for level flight at several typical initial
altitudes plus data for climb to and cruise at optimum altitude from the initial altitudes
selected. Data shall include a maximum range descent. The fuel required shall not include
a landing reserve. The time data shall not be included.
3.4.10.5.1.6 Additional charts. (See 3.4.10.1.1.5).
3.4.10.6 Part 6 - Endurance.
106

shall be included:
3.4.10.6.1.3.1 Factors affecting endurance. The factors affecting endurance performance,

the effect of airspeed, power, altitude, temperature, inoperative engine, and methods to
obtain maximum endurance should be included.
The following charts shall be provided:
a. Effect of bank angle on maximum endurance.
b. Maximum endurance.
c. Additional charts.
3.4.10.6.1.4.1 Chart data basis. The basis for the endurance charts shall be the higher of
the following speeds:
a. Minimum fuel flow.
b. One hundred twenty percent of minimum buffet onset speed.
3.4.10.6.1.4.2 Effect of bank angle on maximum endurance chart. This chart shall be a plot
of bank angle versus percent of maximum endurance.
3.4.10.6.1.4.3 Maximum endurance chart. This chart shall plot fuel required for loiter
times versus gross weight with parameters of pressure altitude, drag index (see 3.4.3.3), air
temperature, and bank angles. A speed schedule for true mach number, data for all
engines operating, and one engine and two engines inoperative shall be included, as
applicable. When this chart is developed for reciprocating engines CAS/IAS rather than
mach number shall be used.
3.4.10.6.1.5 Additional charts. Any charts peculiar to certain aircraft such as power/EPR
or time for maximum endurance, shall be included.
3.4.10.7 Part 7 - Descent.
107

shall be included:
3.4.10.7.1.3.1 Factors affecting descent. Factors affecting descent such as the types of
descent, the effects of airspeed, drag devices, inoperative engine, time, distance, and fuel
consumption during descent shall be included (see 3.3.4.1.25).
a. Maximum range descent.
b. Enroute descent.
c. Penetration descent.
d. Rapid descent.
e. Additional charts.
3.4.10.7.1.4.1 Descent chart data basis. This shall plot time, distance, and fuel for descent
versus pressure altitude with parameters of drag index (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.1). Data shall be
included for the charts identified in 3.4.10.7.1.4. Similar data shall be presented for
selected configurations if drag index is not used.
3.4.10.7.5 Additional charts. Any charts required for descent information peculiar to
certain aircraft shall be included.
3.4.10.8 Part 8 - Approach and landing.

shall be included:
3.4.10.8.1.3.1 Terminology applicable to approach and landing. The following terms shall
be included:
108
a. Approach speed is the speed for the final approach to landing.
b. Threshold speed is the minimum speed for obstacle clearance.
c. High key or low key position is the altitude in feet over the touchdown point
on the runway.
d. Touchdown speed is the speed at which the main gear touches the ground.
3.4.10.8.1.3.2 Factors affecting approach and landing. The effects of gross weight,
temperature, altitude, RCR, hydroplaning, braking devices such as reverse thrust, speed
brakes, spoilers, and drag chutes shall be discussed. Approach paths, missed approach
characteristics, initial stall warning speeds, approach threshold, and touchdown speeds
shall be included. The method used to obtain the distances shown and the use of crosswind
landing gear to specific aircraft shall be explained.
charts and tables shown below. Two or more of these requirements may be combined into a
single chart if this would enhance or simplify the presentation without degrading the
output data. The following charts shall be provided:
a. Landing crosswind
b. Air minimum control speed
c. Landing speeds
d. Flare distance
e. Landing distance
f. Additional charts
3.4.10.8.1.4.1 Landing crosswind chart. This chart shall be in the same format as specified
in Part 3 (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.4). If the crosswind landing chart is identical to the crosswind
chart referenced above, the chart shall be relabeled and included in the landing section.
3.4.10.8.1.4.2 Air minimum control speed chart. This chart shall be in the same format as
specified in Part 3 (see 3.4.10.3.1.5.17).
3.4.10.8.1.4.3 Landing speeds chart. This chart shall be a plot of gross weight versus
CAS/IAS (knots), with parameters of approach speed, threshold speed, and touchdown
speed at various flap settings, including zero flaps (see 3.3.4.1.25). For estimated data, the
landing lift coefficient utilizing ground effect shall be based on the maximum AOA
attainable with the main landing gear oleo strut positioned for the static condition provided
109
the landing lift coefficient OGE shall not exceed 110 percent of the 1G power-off stall
airspeed for landing configuration. Distances to clear a 50 foot height shall be based on
airspeeds that are at least 120 percent of the 1G power-off stall airspeed for the landing
configuration. Baseline distances shall be for a hard surface dry runway using a maximum
braking coefficient of friction of 0.3. Sufficient time shall be allowed after touchdown for
deployment of drag chutes, activation of reverse thrust devices, plus time for their effect on
deceleration.
3.4.10.8.1.4.4 Flare distance chart. This chart shall be a plot of air temperature in °C (see
3.4.5.2.7.2) versus flare distance from 50 foot height with parameters of pressure altitude
and gross weight (see 3.4.10.1.1.4.11). Correction grids (see A) for various flap setting,
increased threshold speed and wind shall be attached.
3.4.10.8.1.4.5 Landing distance chart. These charts shall be plots of air temperature
versus landing ground roll with parameters of pressure altitude and gross weight (see
3.4.10.1.1.4.11). The charts shall be for landing ground roll and landing distance from 50
feet for selected flap positions with and without decelerating devices. Correction grids (see
3.4.5.2.8) shall be added for increased threshold speed, slope, RCR, reverse thrust, and
wind. Landing data shall be presented for pressure altitudes from -2,000 to +16,000 feet
and for temperatures from -60°C to +60°C. Landing distances based on flight tests shall
not be less than the landing distances required in normal service (see 3.3.4.1.31).
3.4.10.8.1.5 Additional charts (see 3.4.10.1.1.5).
3.4.10.9 Part 9 - Mission planning.

shall be included.
3.4.10.9.1.3.1 Takeoff and landing data (TOLD) card. Complete instructions for filling out
the TOLD card shall be provided and the chart(s) from which the data is extracted shall be
referenced. A sample TOLD card shall be provided like the actual TOLD card located in the
flight crew checklist. Figure 7 shows the typical information required for a TOLD card.
3.4.10.9.1.3.2 In-flight data card. Complete instructions for filling out the in-flight data
card shall be provided. A sample card shall be provided.
3.4.10.9.1.3.3 Mission planning. Sample problems that are typical of the normal missions
accomplished shall be provided. The sample problems shall outline each step in mission
110
planning from start engines to stop engines. Actual performance data chart values shall be
used throughout the problems.
The following charts shall be included:
a. Fuel consumption/jettison
b. Formatting speeds and altitudes
c. Combat speeds, fuel allowances, level flight acceleration, steady state turn
performance, and temperature effect on maximum speed
d. Forward support area operations
e. Additional charts
3.4.10.9.1.4.1 Fuel consumption/jettison chart. Charts for fuel jettison time, fuel
consumption during ground operation, and fuel consumption from brake release to flaps up,
shall be provided.
3.4.10.9.1.4.1.1 Fuel consumption during ground operation. A paragraph discussing fuel

consumption for ground operation shall be provided. A fuel flow value in pounds, for
various power settings, shall be included.
111
TAKEOFF AND LANDING DATA CARD

CONDITIONS
TAKEOFF LANDING
Runway length ______ ft ______ ft
Runway height ______ ft ______ ft
Runway gradient ______ ft ______ ft
Gross weight ______ lb ______ lb
Center of gravity ______ ______
Cross wind component ______ ______
Head wind component ______ ______
Outside air temperature ______ ______
Pressure altitude ______ ft ______ ft
Dew point ______ ______
Runway condition reading ______ ______
Crosswind gear setting ______ ______
TAKEOFF
Flap setting in degrees ______
Engine pressure ratio (or torque) ______
Carb air temperature (as required) ______
Refusal speed/distance ______ kt / ______ ft
Rotation speed ______ kt
Engine out climb speed (multi-engine) ______ kt
LANDING
IMMEDIATELY FINAL
AFTER TAKEOFF LANDING
Approach speed ______ kt ______ kt
Flare speed ______ kt ______ kt
Touchdown speed ______ kt ______ kt
Ground run (max and min) ______ ______
NOTES:
FIGURE 7. TOLD Card Information (typical).
112
3.4.10.9.1.4.1.2 Fuel consumption from brake release to flaps-up. A paragraph discussing

fuel consumption required for takeoff (brake release to flaps-up speed) shall be provided.
An average fuel consumption value(s) in pounds shall be provided.
3.4.10.9.1.4.2 Formatting speeds and altitudes chart. This chart shall plot
airspeed-altitude compatibility for tanker and receiver aircraft with parameters of drag
index, gross weight, and temperature deviation from standard-day. The receiver aircraft
performance shall be corrected for downwash of the tanker thrust. Unless otherwise
specified by the acquiring activity, separate charts, limited by 200 feet per minute climb
potential, with military or normal power, shall be prepared for each receiver/tanker
combination (see 6.2).
3.4.10.9.1.4.3 Combat speeds, fuel allowances, level flight acceleration, steady state turn
performance, and temperature effect on maximum speed. Unless otherwise specified by the
acquiring activity, these charts shall be included in this section (see 6.2).
3.4.10.9.1.4.4 Forward support area operations. Planning criteria, procedures,

performance charts and necessary explanatory text covering operations from forward
support areas shall be included. This data is not required if the aircraft is not capable of
operations from a forward support area. The acquiring activity shall determine the need
for this data (see 6.2).
3.4.10.9.1.5 Additional charts (see 3.4.10.1.1.5 and 6.2).
3.4.10.10 Helicopters. The following paragraphs contain the requirements for development
of helicopter performance data. The requirements above may be used to provide additional
guidance in developing helicopter performance data. Where the requirements differ, those
in the following paragraphs shall take precedence for helicopters.
3.4.10.10.1 Chart requirements. All charts shall be graphical. The charts for maximum
gross weight for hovering and the chart for power required to hover shall be placed on
opposite pages. For multi-engine helicopters, operation after failure of one or more engines
shall be included in the charts for maximum gross weight for hovering, minimum height for
safe landing after engine failure, takeoff distance, climb, service ceiling, and cruise (range
and endurance). Standard-day lines shall be omitted on all charts except the density
altitude chart. Airspeeds shall be shown as "CAS/IAS" except in charts where the use of
CAS/IAS instead of TAS would result in significant errors in the performance information.
3.4.10.10.2 Range of chart parameters. Unless otherwise specified, the range of

parameters shall be OAT in increments of 10°C, density altitude from -8,000 feet to +30,000
feet, pressure altitude from -2,000 feet to +20,000 feet, headwind from 0 to 30 knots, rotor
RPM from the minimum power-on to the maximum power-on RPM, and wheel/skid height
from 0 feet to OGE. The altitude scale range may increase or decrease depending on the
performance capabilities of the individual aircraft.
113
3.4.10.10.3 Chart explanation. Explanations and example problems shall be given for the
a. Airspeed installation correction.
b. Density altitude.
c. Power available.
d. Fuel flow (turboshaft engines).
e. Maximum gross weight for hovering.
f. Power required to hover.
g. Headwind influence on maximum gross weight for hovering.
h. Headwind influence on power required to hover.
i. Power deterioration check (turboshaft engine).
j. Minimum height for safe landing after engine failure.
k. Takeoff distance.
l. Climb.
m. Service ceiling.
n. Cruise (range and endurance).
o. One engine inoperative capability.
p. Maximum airspeed for blade stall.
q. Power-on landing distances.
r. Additional charts (see 3.4.10.1.1.5).
3.4.10.10.3.1 Airspeed installation correction chart. This chart shall be a graph of KCAS
versus KIAS and KIAS versus KTAS. Flight conditions that shall be included are level
flight, climb, autorotation, and powered descent (R/D= 500 FPM).
114
3.4.10.10.3.2 Density altitude chart. This chart shall be a plot of density attitude versus
OAT for parameters of pressure altitude and reciprocal of the square root of density ratio
(smoh). A scale for smoh (1//F) shall be added to the right side.
3.4.10.10.3.3 Power available.
3.4.10.10.3.3.1 Turboshaft engines chart. This chart for power available in hover and
takeoff shall be a plot of air temperature versus torque with parameters of pressure
altitude in increments of 2,000 feet and units of torque from zero to the limitation.
Separate charts shall be required for maximum power, military power, and maximum
continuous power. The transmission limit shown on the chart shall be based on the time
duration of the power setting.
3.4.10.10.3.3.2 Reciprocating engines. This curve shall be a plot of engine BHP versus
altitude for constant RPM with dotted lines of constant manifold pressure superimposed.
Regions of blower operation shall be noted. This curve shall not include ram air.
3.4.10.10.3.4 Fuel flow (turboshaft engines) chart. This chart shall be a plot of fuel flow
per engine versus torque per engine with parameters of pressure altitude. The pressure
altitude shall range from sea level to 20,000 feet in increments of 2,000 feet. Transmission
limit lines shall be superimposed. The chart shall be based on a constant zero °C air
temperature and the engine specification fuel flow corrected for engine installation losses
and increased +5 percent. The change in fuel flow for ambient temperatures above and
below zero °C shall be noted on the chart. If the engine installation losses vary significantly
throughout the flight envelope, the fuel flow data shall be based on these losses at the long
range cruise speed.
3.4.10.10.3.5 Maximum gross weight for hovering. This curve shall be a plot of hover gross
weight versus pressure altitude with parameters of OAT and correction plots for the power-
on rotor RPM range and wheel height (zero feet to OGE height). Unless otherwise specified
by the acquiring activity, charts shall be for the highest power setting, with a torque
correction factor to be used when the actual engine performance differs significantly from
the engine specification (see 6.2). The rotor RPM correction applies only to helicopters that
have an operational band of rotor RPM.
3.4.10.10.3.6 Power required to hover chart. This chart shall be a plot of gross weight
versus torque pressure with parameters of pressure altitude and correction plots of rotor
RPM, OAT, and wheel height. The rotor RPM correction is applicable only if the helicopter
has an operational band of rotor RPM. This chart shall be placed in the manual on the
right-hand page opposite the chart for maximum gross weight to hover.
3.4.10.10.3.7 Headwind influence on maximum gross weight for hovering chart. This chart
shall contain several plots of headwind versus gross weight for various wheel heights. The
plots shall consist of a baseline at zero knots headwind and guidelines for other wind
speeds. The data shall be based on the baseline rotor speed and the engine power setting
115
used to construct the chart for maximum gross weight for hovering. Headwind influence
curves shall be presented for the lowest operational wheel height, 5 feet, 15 feet, 30 feet,
and OGE.
3.4.10.10.3.8 Headwind influence on power required to hover chart. This chart shall
contain several plots of headwind versus torque pressure for various wheel heights. The
plots shall consist of a baseline at zero knots headwind and guidelines for other wind
speeds. Torque pressure shall range from flight idle to maximum torque. The data shall be
based on the baseline rotor speed used to construct the chart for power required to hover.
Headwind influence curves shall be presented for the lowest operational wheel height, 5
feet, 15 feet, 30 feet, and OGE. This chart shall be placed on the right-hand page opposite
the chart for headwind influence on maximum gross weight for hovering.
3.4.10.10.3.9 Power deterioration check (turboshaft engine) chart. This chart shall provide
the pilot with a means to determine the degree of engine deterioration from initial
installation. A statement shall be included that the chart provides the initial power
characteristics and that periodic checks shall be made to observe trends. The parameters
shall be torque, pressure altitude, air temperature, and turbine inlet temperature. Various
turboshaft engines may require a different power indicator such as gas producer speed or
exhaust gas (tailpipe) temperature. The percent reduction in torque to allow freedom from
engine stall shall be as established by the engine manufacturer. The range of parameters
shall be pressure altitude from sea level to 20,000 feet in increments of 2,000 feet. Torque
pressure and turbine inlet temperature shall be from flight idle to maximum power.
3.4.10.10.3.10 Minimum height for safe landing after engine failure chart. This chart shall
be a plot of the minimum height required for safe landing after engine failure versus level
flight airspeed in KCAS/KIAS. Regions of avoidance, caution, and safe operation shall be
shown. The avoidance area shall be labeled "avoid continuous operation". Because the
chart is a safety of flight item, it shall be shaded to show the regions of safe operation,
caution, and avoidance. Separate charts shall be furnished for several gross weights and
power levels. The page containing this chart shall have an emergency border in accordance
with the requirements of MIL-STD-38784. For single-engine helicopters, the density
altitude shall extend from sea level to at least 12,000 feet. For multi-engine helicopters, the
format of this chart shall be the same as for single-engine helicopters, except the chart shall
be based on a condition of total power failure. For a single-engine failure in a multi-engine
helicopter, the chart shall be in terms of pressure altitude with ambient temperature
corrections. The definition of power failure and time delay for corrective action for all
helicopters shall be as contained in MIL-H-8501.
3.4.10.10.3.11 Takeoff distance chart. This chart shall be a plot of gross weight versus
total distance required to clear a 50-foot obstacle for parameters of pressure altitude, air
temperature and correction plots of climbout airspeed and headwind. Ranges of
parameters shall be pressure altitude in increments of 2,000 feet and climbout airspeed of
10 to 60 KCAS/KIAS. A correction plot relating maximum hover wheel/skid height to
takeoff distance shall be superimposed on the air temperature correction plot. The text
116
shall contain information on the optimum takeoff technique to the maximum hover/skid
height. Charts shall be required for the following takeoff techniques: rolling (wheeled
helicopters), level acceleration, simultaneous climb and acceleration, rotor bleed, sling load,
and sideslip (tandem rotor helicopters). Unless otherwise specified by the acquiring
activity, data for wheeled helicopters shall be presented showing takeoff ground distance
required versus KCAS/KIAS at takeoff (see 6.2). The rotor bleed takeoff shall be considered
an emergency procedure, and the page shall have an emergency border in accordance with
the requirements of MIL-STD-38784. Distances based on flight tests shall be not less than
the takeoff distances required in normal service when the aircraft is operated in accordance
with the instructions contained in Section II of the flight manual. Calculated minimum
distances based on estimates shall be increased at least 15 percent until verified by flight
tests. For land-based helicopters, distances shall be presented for dry sod having a rolling
coefficient of friction of 0.05 for takeoff.
3.4.10.10.3.12 Climb chart. This chart shall present information for pressure altitudes
from sea level to service ceiling in increments of 2,000 feet for parameters of OAT. Climb
information shall be time to climb (minutes), distance traveled (nautical miles), fuel used
(pounds), and rate of climb (feet per minute). Configurations and gross weight shall
correspond to those used in presenting takeoff data. Warmup and takeoff fuel allowances
shall not be included in the curves; however, the text shall identify the fuel allowances.
The warmup and takeoff fuel allowances are 5 minutes (MET0) power at sea level for
reciprocating engines and 2 minutes (maximum continuous power) at sea level for
turboshaft engines. A note shall be entered on the chart to indicate the quantity of fuel
allowance. Time to climb and fuel used shall be based on the integrated rate of climb from
sea level. No allowance shall be made for weight reduction. Best climb CAS/IAS, manifold
pressure and supercharger ratio shall be shown. Separate charts shall be required for each
power setting. The charts shall be based on a constant climb speed which must be an
integer number divisible by five and in units of CAS/IAS such as 60, 65, 70, etc.
3.4.10.10.3.13 Service ceiling chart. This chart shall be a plot of service ceiling (altitude at
which rate of climb is 100 feet per minute at a given weight) versus gross weight with
parameters of air temperature. The pressure altitude shall range from sea level to at least
25,000 feet. Curves shall be based on military and maximum continuous power. The
service ceiling data shall be based on the same climb speed schedule and configuration as
specified in 3.4.10.10.3.12. For multi-engine helicopters, an additional chart shall be
prepared showing service ceiling with one engine inoperative.
3.4.10.10.3.14 Cruise (range and endurance) chart. These charts shall present range and
endurance data versus TAS for parameters of pressure altitude in increments of 2,000 feet
from sea level to 20,000 feet or service ceiling, whichever is less. The airspeed conversion
plot (KTAS to KIAS) shall be located below the specific range plot. The baseline,
superimposed on the W/* guidelines shall be located on the long range speed for the
configuration shown (see 3.4.10.5.1.3.1b). The gross weight increments for the specific
range plot should be between 10 percent and 20 percent of the maximum useful load.
These charts shall be located on opposing pages in the manual.
117
3.4.10.10.3.14.1 Cruise (range and endurance without compressibility effects). For

helicopters that do not experience power required increases due to rotor blade
compressibility effects (not more than 5 percent increase in power required), the altitudes
in the range and endurance charts shall be density altitudes. The notation specifying the
range of OAT in °C shall not be included.
3.4.10.10.3.14.2 Cruise (range and endurance with compressibility effects). For helicopters
that experience power required increases due to rotor blade compressibility effects, the
altitudes in the range and endurance charts shall be pressure altitudes. Range data at the
long range airspeed shall be determined for various altitudes at a constant +30°C air
temperature. Additional charts shall be required when air temperature below +30°C
causes a decrease in unit range of 5 percent or greater. The air temperature range for this
chart shall be entered in the note.
3.4.10.10.3.15 Single-engine capability chart. This chart shall present absolute ceiling
information. The chart shall consist of gross weight, fuel flow, and indicated torque versus
OAT, for pressure altitudes from sea level to absolute ceiling in 2,000 foot increments. The
chart shall be based on the single-engine best climb speed at military power. A correction
plot for rates of descent from 0 feet per minute to 600 feet per minute shall also be included
on the chart. The chart shall have an emergency border in accordance with the
requirements of MIL-STD-38784.
3.4.10.10.3.16 Maximum airspeed for blade stall chart. This chart shall be a plot of
pressure altitude versus blade stall airspeed in units of CAS/IAS with parameters of OAT
and correction plots for rotor RPM, gross weight, and angle of bank. The angle of bank
shall range from 0 to 50°.
3.4.10.10.3.17 Power-on landing distance chart. This chart shall be a plot of density
altitude versus power-on horizontal landing distance and landing ground roll with
parameters of gross weight and correction plots for headwinds. Distances based on flight
test data shall not be less than the landing distances required in normal service when the
aircraft is operated in accordance with the instructions for a normal power-on landing
contained in Section II of the flight manual. Estimated data shall be increased by 15
percent. The distance for land-based helicopters, shall be presented for firm day sod having
a braking coefficient of 0.25.
3.4.10.10.4 Additional charts. Special charts that are peculiar to certain aircraft and
necessary to completely define the operation or restrictions of the aircraft may be included
and are shown below:
a. Airspeed fuselage mach number curve.
b. KIAS versus KTAS (if used, this chart shall be located after the airspeed
calibration chart. Data shall be provided for level flight and climb).
118
c. Minimum flying speed.
d. Airspeed rotor tip mach number curve.
e. OEG hovering endurance.
f. Gross weight limitation.
3.5 Mission crew manual. This manual shall be prepared to furnish additional information
required for a function, or to provide additional information for a given crew station. The
information contained in this manual shall be sufficient to allow the crew member to
perform assigned functions, interface with the remainder of the flight crew, and provide a
stand-alone document for all information required (including emergency procedures) by the
crew member. The mission crew manual shall be prepared to the requirements of this
paragraph and the content shall meet the requirements of this specification where
applicable.
3.5.1 Function. This manual shall cover pertinent information that is applicable to a
system or piece of equipment, specific functions or procedures, and will normally be utilized
for special functions or by particular crew members. Items requiring coordination with the
pilot or other crew members shall also appear in the standard flight manual and/or other
mission crew manuals where appropriate. Items such as oxygen checks, ditching position,
emergency stations, and aircraft emergencies shall be contained in the mission crew
manual.
3.5.2 References. The mission crew manual and the flight manual shall completely
reference each other, where necessary. The title pages and tables of contents shall
reference each other.
3.5.3 Front matter (mission crew manual). Front matter requirements for this manual
shall be the same as for the flight manual except that the title page need not have the same
issue date as the flight manual (see 3.3.2). The title shall also depict the function(s) covered
therein.
3.5.4 Sections (mission crew manual). This manual shall have five Sections. When
specified, additional sections shall be included (see 3.5.4.6) in addition to the following:
a. Section I - Description and theory of operation.
b. Section II - Normal procedures.
c. Section III - Emergency procedures.
d. Section IV - Malfunction analysis and alternate procedures.
119
e. Section V - In-flight repairs.
3.5.4.1 Section I Description and theory of operation. This section shall contain the
description of the system and theory of operation.
3.5.4.2 Section II Normal procedures. This section shall contain numbered procedures
beginning with the entry of the applicable crew member into the aircraft and progressing in
phases until the crew member leaves the aircraft. Any inspections or interface required of
the crew member with other members of the crew shall be provided.
3.5.4.3 Section III Emergency procedures. This section shall provide emergency procedures
for any systems under the control of the crew member(s) covered by the manual. Common
crew member responsibilities for aircraft emergencies shall also be provided.
3.5.4.4 Section IV Malfunction analysis and alternate procedures. This section shall
contain malfunction analysis and the alternate procedures to follow for maximum use of the
equipment in accomplishing the assigned mission.
3.5.4.5 Section V In-flight repairs. This section shall include instructions on making
repairs that can be accomplished during flight. This section may be combined with Section
IV if it is determined to be more advantageous to the involved crew member, and is
approved by the acquiring activity (see 6.2).
3.5.4.6 Additional sections. When specified, additional sections shall be added to the
manual (see 6.2). Numbering of added sections shall be consecutive beginning with Section
VI. In the event that additional sections are required and Section V has been combined
with Section IV, the added section(s) shall begin with Section VI and a statement shall be
included explaining that Section V has been included as part of Section IV.
3.6 Supplemental manual. This manual shall provide supplemental operating instructions
for aircraft which have been modified with special equipment. Since a complete standard
flight manual is available for the standard aircraft, only the additional data which is
necessary to cover the differences created by the modification shall be covered. A drag
index will be used where possible in lieu of developing complete performance data. The
supplemental manual shall also be utilized to present classified information when
necessary. If there is a need to present both classified and unclassified information, the
development of two supplemental manuals may be authorized by the acquiring activity (see
6.2). This paragraph shall not be used to develop performance data or load configuration
supplements. In the event that a supplemental manual impacts the flight crew checklist,
the acquiring activity shall determine the extent of the requirement and when specified, the
appropriate checklist shall be prepared in accordance with paragraph 3.7.
3.6.1 Content and format. The content and format shall be the same as specified for the
standard flight manual.
120
3.6.2 References. The supplemental manual shall be completely referenced to the flight
manual. If specified by the acquiring activity, the flight manual shall reference an
unclassified supplemental manual (see 6.2). References to classified supplements shall not
be included in the flight manual except as specified in 3.3.2.1.2 and 3.3.2.4.1.
3.6.3 Title page. The title page to the supplemental manual shall be prepared as specified
in 3.3.2.1.
3.6.4 Main table of contents. A complete table of contents shall be included. The table of
contents shall be prepared using the same format as specified in 3.3.2.4.1 for classified
supplements.
3.6.5 Foreword/Preface/Introduction. The foreword shall cover the scope and concept of the
manual.
3.6.6 Section titles. If an entire section is omitted, the section title and a note to refer to
the flight manual for the required information shall be included. If two or more sections in
sequence are omitted from the partial manual, a notation similar to the following shall be
included:
"Sections I through III (See TO .......)"
3.6.7 Tables of contents. A table of contents shall be included for each section of the
supplemental manual unless the section consists of only a few pages wherein a table of
contents would not serve a useful function. If a table of contents is included, it shall be
complete. If any portion of the material is covered in the supplemental manual, reference
shall be made to the page on which that item begins.
3.6.8 Coverage within sections. Each section shall clearly identify the portion of
information contained therein, and the portion which is contained in the flight manual.
However, when only a few subjects or pages of the supplemental manual are involved, it
shall be permissible to include an introduction stating the following: "Except for the
following, all other limitations are covered in TO ...." The same convention shall be
employed when only a portion of a major paragraph is included in the supplemental
manual. The supplemental manual shall also identify any information in the flight manual
that is not applicable to the modified aircraft.
NOTE: If the normal or the emergency procedures are changed from the standard flight
manual, it shall be necessary to present the entire procedure (as changed in the
supplemental manual).
3.6.9 Index. Unless otherwise specified, an alphabetical index shall be included in the
supplemental manual.
3.7 Abbreviated flight crew checklist requirements. The requirements contained herein
121
are for the development of abbreviated flight crew checklists based on information
contained in the flight manual. See paragraph 6.5 for definition of the types of checklists.
Specialized checklists for items such as weapons delivery and cargo loading shall not be
prepared using the requirements of this specification. Refer to the DODISS to determine
the appropriate specifications to be used to develop these specialized checklists. When
specified by the acquiring activity, an integrated flight crew checklist shall be prepared
(see 6.2). An integrated flight crew checklist shall contain all applicable checklists (i.e.,
flight manual, air refueling, weapons delivery, etc.).
3.7.1 Source and sequence of checklist data. The information for checklists shall be drawn
from the flight manual procedures (see 3.2.12.2.1.2). Unless otherwise specified (see 6.2),
the information shall be arranged in the same sequence as the parent manual (with
exception of the emergency procedures for the Class 2 checklist). The emergency
procedures section in the Class 2 checklist shall be located as specified by the acquiring
activity (see 6.2).
3.7.2 Content. The content of the flight crew checklist shall be as specified herein. The
general requirements of 3.3.2 apply to checklists except as specified below in the
development of front matter.
3.7.2.1 Checklist title page. The title page shall include the crew position of the crew
member for whom the checklist is applicable.
3.7.2.2 Table of contents. A table of contents is not required for the front matter. A table
of contents as specified in 3.3.2.4 shall be prepared for each section or part of the checklist.
3.7.2.3 List of effective pages. A list of current abbreviated flight crew checklists (as
prescribed in paragraph 3.3.2.2 for the flight manual) shall not be included on the List of
Effective Pages for checklists.
3.7.2.4 Introduction for Class 1 and 2 checklists. The introduction shall contain a brief
explanation of the purpose and scope of the checklist as well as a brief discussion covering
it's use. The information provided shall not duplicate the information contained in the
introduction of the parent manual.
3.7.3 Performance data for Class 1 and 2 checklists. Performance data shall be presented
in the most readable form and shall be easily accessible. Tabular data is generally
preferred to graphical data due to the size limitations involved.
3.7.4 Illustrations. Illustrations shall not be included in the flight crew checklists unless
approved by the acquiring activity (see 6.2). If illustrations are authorized, the following
criteria shall apply. The illustration shall be derived from the flight manual. Figure
numbers shall not be used. Illustration titles shall correspond to the title used in the flight
manual.
122
3.7.5 Takeoff and landing data (TOLD) card. A TOLD card shall be provided
in the flight crew checklist. This card shall contain information similar to that provided in
Figure 7 (tailored to meet the requirements of the particular aircraft). Instructions for
using the TOLD card shall not be provided in the checklist. Unless otherwise specified, the
TOLD card shall be located on the last page(s) in the normal procedures section of the
checklist (see 6.2). Adequate space shall be provided for each information category to allow
for the entry of values by the crew member.
3.7.6 Page numbering for Class 1 and 2 checklists. Each page of the Class 1 and 2
checklists shall be numbered. The page numbers of the introduction shall be lower-case
numerals (i, ii, etc). Unless otherwise specified (see 6.2), the page numbering format for
Class 1 and 2 checklists shall conform to the numbering format of the parent manual with
the exception of the emergency procedures section of the Class 2 checklist. The first page of
the emergency procedures section of the Class 2 checklist shall be numbered E-1. If more
than one version of a section or part is included in the flight manual (i.e., coverage of
various configurations of aircraft/systems), the page numbering format in the checklist
shall correspond to the numbering format of the parent manual. Except for the emergency
procedures in the Class 2 checklist, each section of the checklist shall begin at the top of a
right-hand page.
3.7.7 Abbreviated checklist content requirements. Class 1 or 2 checklists developed from

data derived from a flight manual prepared in accordance with this specification, shall
contain all the information required by the crew member in order to function as part of the
crew complement. Figure 8 provides an example of a Class 1 or Class 2 checklist page.
3.7.8 Class 3 (scroll) checklist. The Class 3 (scroll) checklist shall be developed from data
taken from the normal procedures section of the flight manual. Each Class 3 checklist shall
provide only the procedures for the crew position for which it is designated (i.e., pilot or
navigator). Line items may be further abbreviated to fit the procedure on one line. Class 3
(scroll) checklists shall duplicate the information contained in the applicable portion of the
Class 1 or 2 checklist and shall contain only the normal procedures that can be
accomplished while occupying the applicable crew station. The procedural paragraph
heading from the flight manual shall be included. If there is a reference in the flight
manual procedure, it may be included in the Class 3 (scroll) checklist. Figure 9 provides an
example of a Class 3 checklist.
3.7.9 Checklist format and arrangement. The flight crew checklists shall be prepared
using the checklist requirements contained in MIL-PRF-5096, MIL-STD-38784, and as
specified herein.
3.7.9.1 Class 1 and 2 checklists.
3.7.9.1.1 Class 1 checklist. Class 1 checklists shall be prepared in 4½ by 7-inch size and
the maximum printing area shall be 3 e by 6 ½- inches.
123
3.7.9.1.2 Class 2 Checklist. Class 2 checklists shall be prepared in one of the following
sizes:
TABLE II. Class 2 Checklist sizes.
Checklist size Maximum Staggered

printing area pages
5 by 8-in 4c by 7 ½- in YES
5 by 9-in 4c by 8 ½-in YES

5¼ by 11-in 5c by 10 ½-in NO
5¾ by 11-in 5e by 10½-in NO
3.7.9.1.2.1 Checklist page length. When specified by the acquiring activity (see 6.2), the
following additional requirements apply to Class 1 and 2 checklists: The length of the
emergency pages for Class 2 checklists shall be staggered vertically in ¼-inch increments to
permit the visual indexing of the procedures at the bottom of the page. The last page of the
emergency procedures shall be 8-inches (9-inches for the 5 by 9-inches) in length and shall
be the longest page in the emergency procedures. Page numbers for staggered pages shall
be centered at the bottom of the page.
a. When specified by the acquiring agency, the Class 1 or Class 2 checklists

shall be printed on JCP-040 (115 pounds per 500 sheets) white or yellow
paper.
b. When specified by the acquiring agency, the checklist pages shall be

laminated.
3.7.9.1.2.2 Checklist page tabs. Each page shall have a tab title on each side of the page
number. The tab title at the right of the page number shall identify the data contained on
the page. The tab title to the left of the page number shall identify the data on the
preceding page. The change number identifier for staggered pages shall be located
immediately under the TO number near the upper outer corner of the page.
3.7.9.2 Checklist page emergency borders. Emergency page markings shall be provided
across the top of the page only. The acquiring agency shall provide specific guidance
concerning the arrangement of the data within this format.
3.7.9.3 Class 1 and Class 2 checklist drilling dimensions. For drilling dimensions, see
Figure 10. Unless otherwise specified, pages shall be printed on JCP-A60 (50 pounds per
500 sheets) white paper.
3.7.9.4 Class 3 (scroll) checklists. Scroll checklists shall be prepared on UV emulsion, black
124
image, sensitized on one side, matte on reverse side, 0.0043-in thick mylar-polyester film
(Technifax part number P3200M or equivalent). Film shall be trimmed to form a finished
size of 2 ¾ by 96 (maximum) inch size. The print area shall be 2 ½by 91 (maximum) inch
size. Scroll checklists shall be revised rather than changed when changes to the material
are required.
125
TO 1F-4(R)C-1CL-1
TAXIING
1. Wheel Brakes - TEST

2. Nose gear steering - ENGAGE & CHECK
3. (P-WSO) Flight instruments - CHECK OPERATION
4. (P-WSO) Oxygen diluter lever - AS REQUIRED
5. (P) Electronic altimeter - ON, SET CLEARANCE PLANE
6. (WSO) Electronic altimeter - CHECK
7. (P-WSO) FLR - CHECK
8. (WSO) FLR mode selector - STBY
9. (P-WSO) RWR/ECM - AS REQUIRED
10. (WSO) Sensor checks - AS REQUIRED
11. (WSO) Window defog - ON
BEFORE TAKEOFF
1. (P-WSO) Harness & leads - FASTENED
2. Internal wing transfer switch - NORMAL
3. Tanks 5&6 lockout - AS REQUIRED
4. Stab aug switches - ENGAGE
5. Flight controls - UNRESTRICTED (WSO visually check control surfaces)
6. Anti-ice switch - AS REQUIRED
7. Stabilizer trim - CHK 1 TO 3 UNITS NOSE DN
8. Fuel quantity - CHECK
9. (P-WSO) Canopies - CLOSE, CHECK
10. Defog-footheat & temp control - AS REQUIRED
11. (WSO) Command selector valve
12. (P-WSO) Lower ejection handle safety guard - CLEAR
13. Warning lights/voice warning system - CHECK
After runway lineup -
14. External transfer switch - AS DESIRED

15. Flaps - DOWN
16. Anti-skid - ON, LIGHT OUT
Change 3 2-17
FIGURE 8. Example page of Class 1 or Class 2 Checklist.
126
STOP TURNING
\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\\
T.O. 1C-5A-1CL-1-1
12. Cargo Door System - AS
24 MAY 1989 REQUIRED
13. Inertial Positions -
PILOT'S SCROLL "CHECKED" (CP,P,N)
14. INS Mode Selector Switches -
CHECKLIST "AS REQUIRED" (CP,P,N)
15. FSAS Power Switch - OFF 16.
AIRPLANE Engineer's Report -
"CHECK COMPLETED" (E)
USAF SERIES 17. Engine Shutdown Check -
"COMPLETED" (CP)
C-5A AND C-5B BEFORE LEAVING
AF33(657)-15053 Switches -
1. PACS Pitch and Roll
F41608-88-D-A383 "OFF" (P)
2. AFCS - OFF
3. Oxygen Regulators -
THIS PUBLICATION REPLACES "100%AND OFF" (CP,P)
T.O. 1C-5A-1CL-1-1 DATED 4. Stallimiter System -"OFF"
2 AUGUST 1988 (CP,P)
(DISTRIBUTION STATEMENT) 5. IFF - OFF, CODES - AS
(EXPORT CONTROL NOTICE) REQUIRED
(HANDLING AND DESTRUCTION 6. Parking Brake - "AS
NOTICE) REQUIRED" (P)
7. Before Leaving Airplane Check -
Note "COMPLETED" (CP)
This scroll checklist reflects information contained
in the Pilot's Abbreviated Flight Crew
END
BEFORE STARTING ENGINES T.O. 1C-5A-1CL-1-1

1. Forms 781 & 365-4 -
"CHECKED AND SIGNED" STOP TURNING
(P)
2. Oxygen - "CHECKED AND ON"
(CP,P)
3. Radios, Radar Altimeters, and IFF -
"ON AND STBY"
(CP,P)
4. INS Interface Check - "AS

REQUIRED" (CP,P,N)
////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
FIGURE 9. Example Class 3 Checklist.
127
7 in
1/4 in 1/4 in
1/4 in 3/4 in 3/4 in 3 in 3/4 in 3/4 in 3/4 in
6 HOLES -- 1/4 DIAMETER
8 in
1/4 in 1/4 in
1 in 3/4 in 3/4 in 3 in 3/4 in 3/4 in 1 in
6 HOLES -- 1/4 DIAMETER
FIGURE 10. Drilling dimensions, 4 ½ by 7 and 5 by 8-inch checklists.
128
4. VERIFICATION
4.1 Verification. Unless otherwise specified in the contract or purchase order:
a. Validity of the accuracy and scope of the flight manual technical content, and
user interface functionality shall be the responsibility of the contractor (see
6.6.6).
b. The contractor shall provide suitable facilities to perform the validation

functions specified herein.
c. The contractor's existing quality assurance procedures shall be used.
d. The government reserves the right to review any of the verifications.
4.1.1 Minimum verification requirements. As a minimum, verification shall ensure the

following:
a. Suitability of the flight manuals for the intended environment.
b. Usability by the intended users.
c. Compatibility with other government systems.
4.1.2 Compliance. All flight manuals shall meet all requirements of Sections 3 and 5. The
requirements set forth in this specification shall become a part of the contractor's overall
inspection system or quality program. The absence of any requirements in this
specification shall not relieve the contractor of the responsibility of ensuring that all
products or supplies submitted to the government for acceptance comply with all
requirements of the contract. Use of sampling inspections shall be in accordance with
commercially acceptable quality assurance procedures; however, government approval for
use of sampling in QA procedures does not authorize submission of known defective
material, either indicated or actual, nor does it commit the government to accept defective
material.
5. PACKAGING.
5.1 Packaging. For acquisition purposes, the packaging requirements shall be as specified
in the contract or order (see 6.2). When actual packaging of material is to be performed by
DoD personnel, these personnel need to contact the responsible packaging activity to
ascertain requisite packaging requirements. Packaging requirements are maintained by
the Inventory Control Point's packaging activity within the Military Department or
Defense Agency, or within the Military Department's System Command. Packaging data
retrieval is available from the managing Military Department's or Defense Agency's
automated packaging files, CD-ROM products, or by contacting the responsible packaging
activity.
129
5.2 Printing standard. All flight manual publications shall be prepared to quality level III
as specified in GPO Publication 310.1.
6. NOTES.
(This section contains information of a general or explanatory nature which may be helpful,
but is not mandatory.)
6.1 Intended use. This specification covers flight manuals that are intended to provide
information for flight crews in the operation of aircraft and their on-board systems.
6.2 Acquisition requirements. Acquisition documents should specify the following:
a. Title, number, and date of this document.
b. Whether features other than as specified herein are required (1.1).
c. Issue of the DODISS to be cited in the solicitation, and if required, the

specific issue of individual documents referenced herein (2.2.1, 2.2.2).
d. Whether Performance Data will default as a separate manual or be developed

as an appendix within the Flight Manual itself (3.2c).
e. Approval of critical 'Warnings' and 'Cautions' as well as the use of the letters
'W' or 'C' in the flight crew checklists (3.2.1).
f. Whether the acquiring activity requires standardized part nouns and not
necessarily as reflected on the engineering drawings (3.2.2.1).
g. Whether color shall be used to distinguish flow patterns on complex

diagrams (3.2.4).
h. Whether a status page for changes shall be provided as part of the change
packages (3.2.8.1).
i. Whether a mission crew manual should be developed to support a complex

system (3.2.9.1).
j. Whether pilot and copilot procedures shall be combined in single

column format or presented in separate (multiple) columns (3.2.12.1.1).
k. Whether the crew designator will be placed in front of, or after the
procedural step (3.2.12.1.1).
l. Whether additional crew designator letters are required (3.2.12.1.1.2).
130
m. Whether flight manual and associated checklists will be classified

(3.2.25).
n. Types of manuals and checklists to be procured (3.3).
o. Approval of section arrangement other than specified herein (3.3).
p. Approval of added sections and added section titles in the flight manual.
Specify who will develop and maintain the DTD's and FOSI's required to
support these and other additions and deviations to flight
manual/performance data/mission crew/supplemental manual/abbreviated
checklist layout (3.3).
q. Approval for additional section titles (3.3).
r. Whether performance data is required (3.3).
s. Whether air refueling procedures will be created as stand-alone section or

incorporated within the manual as a system (3.3 and 3.3.10).
t. Method of including trainer version of aircraft information (if applicable) in

the flight manual (3.3.1).
u. Which emergency procedures notice to include on the title page of a classified

flight manual (3.3.2.1.3).
v. Determine what common information service will be required

(3.3.2.6.1).
w. How the material in Section I will be presented (3.3.3).
x. Whether separate or combined electrical system schematics will be provided

(3.3.3.9.1).
y. Whether a diagram is required showing area of illumination for exterior

lighting (3.3.3.31).
z. Whether unusual takeoff information will be provided (3.3.4.1.20).
aa. Development of landing procedures in checklist format (3.3.4.1.31).
ab. Whether emergency entrance information shall be included (3.3.5.11.1).
ac. The arrangement of emergency procedures by system or phase of operation

(3.3.5.1).
131
ad. Content requirements for Mission Crew Duties/Procedures section

(3.3.6).
ae. Whether Table of Servicing Fluids will contain aircraft capacities (3.3.7.1).
af. Whether a Summary Table of Limitations will be provided (3.3.7.4).
ag. Any changes, additions, or deletions to flight characteristic data

requirements in Section VI (3.3.8).
ah. Whether additional air refueling data information is required (3.3.10.1).
ai. Whether any additional air refueling flight safety lessons learned are to be
provided (3.3.10.2).
aj. If all performance data charts presented in the flight manual shall be in a
format other than Drag Index Format (see 3.4.2).
ak. Whether additional tables will be allowed in the performance data section
(3.4.3.2).
al. Whether nomographs may be used in the performance data section (3.4.3.5).
am. Whether to add a fuel flow conservation factor for fixed-wing aircraft
(3.4.4.2b).
an. Whether limit lines representing any safety limitations or restrictions shall
be included (3.4.5.2.7.1).
ao. Whether to provide temperature subscales in Fahrenheit (3.4.5.2.7.2).
ap. Whether to place correction grids on performance data charts on the same
chart or on separate page opposite the chart (3.4.5.2.8).
aq. Whether to use a correction grid or prepare a separate chart for all but
takeoff flap settings (3.4.5.2.8.6).
ar. Whether acquiring activity must provide sample charts (3.4.9).
as. Provide the location of the bordered title on performance data charts
(3.4.5.2.10.1).
at. Whether to use a different method to account for stores interference on drag
number tables (3.4.10.1.1.4.1).
132
au. Approval of contractor format for aircraft gross weight and center of gravity
chart (3.4.10.1.1.4.11).
av. Other types of takeoff acceleration checks other than those specified
(3.4.10.3.1.3.2o).
aw. Specify maximum tolerance for acceleration check speed (3.4.10.3.1.3.2q).
ax. Whether the "Wind Summary Sample Table" shall be included

(3.4.10.3.1.3.3).
ay. Define Not-to-Exceed full gust increment value in knots (TABLE I).
az. If charts shall be furnished for zero flap settings and alternate fuel grades
(3.4.10.3.1.5.5).
ba. If coefficients for other types of surfaces shall be furnished (3.4.10.3.1.5.5b).
bb. If data for other than normal operation such as maximum effort shall be
based on flight tests (3.4.10.3.1.5.5d).
bc. If reduced power takeoff performance data charts shall be provided

(3.4.10.3.1.5.6).
bd. Whether an assist takeoff ignition time chart is required (3.4.10.3.1.5.7).
be. Whether to provide a runway transverse gradient chart (3.4.10.3.1.5.16h).
bf. Whether to use smaller increments on range charts (3.4.10.5.1.5.3a).
bg. Whether specialized or additional charts are required for mission planning
(3.4.10.9.1.4.2, 3.4.10.9.1.4.3, 3.4.10.9.1.4.4, and 3.4.10.9.1.5).
bh. Define chart format for Maximum Gross Weight for Hovering (3.4.10.10.3.5).
bi. Other methods of presenting wheeled helicopter takeoff data (3.4.10.10.3.11).
bj. Format and Sections to be included in a mission crew manual (3.5.4.5, and
3.5.4.6).
bk. Whether two supplemental manuals will need to be procured covering

classified and unclassified data (3.6).
bl. Whether the Flight Manual will reference unclassified supplemental manuals
(3.6.2).
133
bm. Whether an alphabetical index is required for the supplemental manual

(3.6.9).
bn. Whether an integrated flight crew checklist will be developed (3.7).
bo. Location and arrangement of checklist data (3.7.1).
bp. Whether to authorize use of illustrations in flight crew checklists (3.7.4).
bq. Location of the TOLD card within the checklist (3.7.5).
br. Page numbering format for Class 1 and 2 checklists (3.7.6).
bs. Specify Class 2 page size (3.7.9.1.2)
bt. Specify additional requirements for Class 1 and 2 checklists (3.7.9.1.2.1).
bu. Packaging requirements (5.1).
6.3 Acronyms.
a. AFMAN - Air Force Manual

b. AOA - Angle of attack
c. APU - Auxiliary power unit
d. ASSIST - Acquisition Streamlining and Standardization Information System
e. BHP - Brake horsepower
f. BMEP - Brake mean effective pressure
g. CALS - Continuous Acquisition and Life-cycle Support
h. CAS - Calibrated airspeed
i. CG - Center of gravity
j. COTS - Commercial Off-The-Shelf
k. DODISS- Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards
l. DTD - Document Type Definition
m. EAS - Equivalent airspeed
n. EPR - Engine pressure ratio
o. GPO - Government Printing Office
p. GSA - General Services Administration
q. HUD - Head up display
r. IAS - Indicated airspeed
s. IFF - Identification friend or foe
t. IGE - In ground effect
u. ILS - Instrument landing system
v. IMC - Instrument meteorological conditions
w. IMN - Indicated mach number
x. IOAT - Indicated outside air temperature
y. KCAS - Knots calibrated airspeed
134
z. KIAS - Knots indicated airspeed

aa. KTAS - Knots true airspeed
ab. MAC - Mean aerodynamic chord
ac. METO - Maximum except for takeoff
ad. OAT - Outside air temperature
ae. OGE - Out of ground effect
af. PIO - Pilot induced oscillation
ag. RCR - Runway condition reading
ah. RPM - Revolutions per minute
ai. RSC - Runway surface covering
aj. SIF - Selective identification feature
ak. TACAN - Tactical air navigation
al. TAS - True airspeed
am. TCTO - Time compliance technical order
an. TO - Technical order
ao. TOLD - Takeoff and landing data
ap. TMN - True mach number
aq. VMCA - Air minimum control speed
6.4 Commercial flight manuals. The contents of MIL-HDBK-1221 will be used as a guide
for the review and acceptance of commercial flight manuals. Acquiring activities will
review the commercial flight manual against the intent of this handbook. Useability and
content of the commercial manual will be the major consideration in reviewing commercial
flight manuals.
6.5 Concurrence of checklists with flight manuals. Checklists shall be issued

simultaneously with the initial issue or revision of the flight manual. Changes to checklists
that are affected by a change or supplement to the flight manual shall be issued with the
change or supplement. (Note: This requirement may allow different crew member
checklists to have different numbers of changes/change dates than is shown on the flight
manual title page.)
6.6 Critical system malfunctions. Some equipment malfunctions historically lead to rapid
deterioration of a critical system which in turn requires the pilot to "Land as Soon as
Possible." Other equipment malfunctions result in a less rapid deterioration of flying
qualities and a less urgent requirement to land. For those malfunctions, the term "Land as
Soon as Practical" has been designated (see 3.3.5).
6.7 Definitions. To clarify the terms used throughout this specification, the following
definitions are given:
6.7.1 Intermediate stops: Stops such as refueling, crew change, or pickup and discharge of
cargo or passengers.
6.7.2 Emergency descent: A descent in which technique and procedures, if exceeded, could
result in superficial damage to the aircraft but does not result in permanent damage or
135
major repairs to the aircraft.
6.7.3 Miscellaneous emergencies: All conditions that do not immediately affect the
airworthiness of the aircraft but that could deteriorate into a dangerous situation.
6.7.4 Drag index number: A summation of the store drag numbers. Scaling of drag
numbers should result in a total drag number equal to or less than 100 units.
6.7.5 Air refueling. The refueling of an aircraft in-flight by another aircraft.
6.7.6 Air refueling control time. The planned time that the receiver and tanker will arrive
over the air refueling control point.
6.7.7 Air refueling initial point. A point located upstream from the air refueling control
point at which the receiver aircraft initiates a rendezvous with the tanker.
6.7.8 Air refueling rendezvous. The procedures employed to enable the receiver(s) to reach
the precontact position behind the assigned tanker(s) by electronic, radio, and/or visual
means.
6.7.9 Alternate rendezvous. A rendezvous accomplished when primary means are not
available.
6.7.10 Altitude blocks. A specified number of altitudes authorized by air traffic control for
operation of aircraft.
6.7.11 Breakaway. The command used by either tanker or receiver crew members to
indicate a need for emergency vertical and horizontal separation of tanker and receiver.
6.7.12 Buddy takeoff/departure. When tanker and receiver take off and climb as an
element/cell.
6.7.13 Contact. That configuration in which the tankers and receivers are physically
engaged and if applicable, their respective electrical systems indicate a contact made
condition.
6.7.14 Contact position. The stabilized position of the receiver within the air refueling
envelope where it is possible to make contact.
6.7.15 Controlled airspace. Airspace requiring communication with an Air Traffic Control
facility.
6.7.16 Disconnect. When tanker and receiver separate from air refueling contact; also it is
a command to separate, but not warranting a breakaway.
6.7.17 En route rendezvous. Procedure used when join-up is to be accomplished en route to

136
the refueling area at the join-up initiation geographic point (RZ) by making good a
scheduled time. Timing may be accomplished by utilizing an orbit delay or timing triangle.
6.7.18 Hot armament. Forward firing ordnance that can be selected and fired by the
receiver pilot or crew.
6.7.19 Join-up. Those procedures employed to enable the tanker to assume formation lead
and the receiver to assume observation position.
6.7.20 Observation position.
a. (Bomber) A position to the right and/or left and slightly behind the tanker
where receiver fly while observing or awaiting air refueling.
b. (Helicopter) A position to the left or right of the tanker, outboard of the

wingtip and slightly above and behind the tanker horizontal stabilizer where
the receivers fly while observing or awaiting air refueling.
c. (Fighter) A position to the right and/or left and slightly behind the tanker
wing with a minimum of one receiver wingspan clearance between tanker
and receiver (weather permitting).
6.7.21 Offset (track). The lateral distance the tanker is displaced from the air refueling
initial point to air refueling control time track to compensate for turn radius and drift.
6.7.22 Overrun.
a. Rendezvous - An overrun when the receiver passes the tanker prior to or

during the tanker rendezvous turn.
b. Closure - An overrun when the receiver’s closure rate prevents stabilizing in

the precontact position, or when forward movement of the receiver is
considered excessive during contact or approach to contact.
6.7.23 Point parallel rendezvous procedures. The procedures normally used when the
tanker arrives in the refueling area ahead of the receiver (A tanker orbit is normally
planned).
6.7.24 Post air refueling procedures. The procedures employed by tankers and receivers
after final disconnect and prior to establishing cruise.
6.7.25 Precontact (ready) position.
a. Boom and receptacle - The position approximately 50 feet behind and slightly
below the tanker boom nozzle where the receiver stabilizes before being
cleared to the contact position.
137
b. Probe and drogue - A position where the probe is approximately 5 feet

directly aft of the drogue.
c. Helicopter - A position behind the paradrogue and slightly below the tanker
wing where the receiver stabilizes before attempting contact.
6.7.26 Radio silence. Air refueling without the aid of verbal instructions.
6.7.27 Radar station keeping. Term used when radar is used as the primary method for
maintaining an aircraft in a specified location.
6.7.28 Rendezvous equipment. Electronic/radio equipment installed in tanker and

receivers for use in accomplishing a rendezvous.
6.7.29 Reverse flow air refueling. The transfer of fuel from receiver to tanker.
6.7.30 Toboggan. The maneuver called for by receiver pilot (verbal or C-130 visual signal)
to the tanker pilot to commence approximately 300 feet per minute rate of descent.
6.7.31 Turn range. The distance used to determine the tanker start turn point and is
measured directly from aircraft to aircraft.
6.7.32 Abbreviated checklists: There are three classes of abbreviated checklists as follows:
Class 1 - Pocket-sized checklists for insertion in standard plastic inserts.
Class 2 - Pocket-sized checklists for attachment to clipboard.
Class 3 - Scroll-type checklists.
6.7.33 Verification. Verification (section 4), in the context of this specification equates to
the contractor's quality assurance program for validating the content of the Flight Manuals.
Suggested validation methods include:
a. Actual performance. Using production configured equipment, hands-on

performance of the procedure using the technical instructions as written.
b. Simulation. Using production configured equipment and the flight manual

procedure, simulate the actions required by the task steps.
c. Table top analysis. Primarily for non-procedural data, compare the

technical content to source data to ensure the technical accuracy and depth of
coverage.
6.8 Documentation of deviations or additional requirements. Procurement documents will

require documentation of each deviation by specification paragraph number and of all items
138
that are not covered in this specification but that are applicable in the preparation of any
flight manual. The documentation of the deviations will also include the reasons for the
deviations and the reasons the specification requirement could not be followed. Copies of
this documentation will be forwarded to the office responsible for this specification.
6.9 Emergencies. Many emergencies will require some urgency in landing the aircraft. If
the pilot waits too long and over-flys "acceptable" recovery bases enroute to a base with a
more favorable landing environment, system degradation may require abandonment of the
aircraft. If however, the pilot overemphasizes the need for an expedited landing and
chooses the nearest base with any degree of acceptability (however marginal), the aircraft
and crew may be subjected to unnecessary risk (see 3.3.5).
6.10 Manifold pressure. To partially offset the loss of power due to humidity, the manifold
pressure limits for maximum power may be increased by the existing water vapor pressure
up to 1.5 inches Hg with the use of a correction scale (see 3.4.10.2.1.4.1a).
6.11 Monitoring aircraft performance. The reason for monitoring aircraft performance is to
determine if a safe takeoff can be made and to give the pilot a basis to determine when to
abort or continue takeoff during an emergency (see 3.4.10.3.1.3.1).
6.12 Technical manuals. The requirement for technical manuals should be considered
when this specification is applied on a contract. If technical manuals are required,
specifications and standards that have been cleared and listed in DoD 5010.12-L,
Acquisition Management Systems and Data Requirements Control List (AMSDL) must be
listed on a separate Contract Data Requirements List (DD Form 1423), which is included as
an exhibit to the contract. The technical manuals must be acquired under separate
contract line item in the contract.
6.12.1 Technical manual acquisition. To acquire the technical manuals described herein,
this specification must be selected in AF TMCR TM-86-01, which is then listed in the
Contract Data Requirements List (DD Form 1423).
6.13 Time compliance technical orders. When modifications have been completed on the
entire fleet, the "before" coverage shall be removed (see 3.3.2.6.1).
6.14 Subject term (key word) listing.
Abbreviated flight manual checklist

Air refueling
Air refueling procedures
Departure procedures
Emergency air refueling procedures
Flight manual
Mission crew manual
Performance data manual
Rendezvous procedures
139
Supplemental flight manual
6.15 Supersession information. This specification supersedes the following document:
MIL-PRF-38413D dated 1 March 1996
6.15 Changes from previous issue. Marginal notations are not used in this revision to
identify changes with respect to the previous issue due to the extent of the change.
140
MIL-DTL-7700G(USAF)
APPENDIX A
FLIGHT MANUALS
DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION
A.1 SCOPE.
A.1.1 Scope. This appendix provides the special or unique criteria, in addition to the provisions of this
specification, required for the development of a flight manual. The markup tags described herein are
based on rules outlined in MIL-PRF-28001 and ISO 8879. This Appendix is a mandatory part of this
specification. The information contained herein is intended for compliance. The document type
definition (DTD) referenced herein may be obtained directly from the preparing activity (see A.5).
A.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
A.2.1 Government documents.
A.2.1.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, standards, and
handbooks form a part of this document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the
issues of these documents are those listed in the ASSIST database (http://www.dodssp.daps.mil/) and
cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
Military
MIL-PRF-28001 Markup Requirements and Generic Style Specification for

Electronic Printed Output and Exchange of Text
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of federal and military specifications, standards, and handbooks are
available from the Standardization Document Order Desk, 700 Robbins Avenue, Building 4D,
Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 or www.dsp.dla.mil.)
A.2.1.2 Non-government publications. The following document(s) form a part of this document to the
extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of the documents which are DoD adopted
are those cited in the solicitation or contract.
NON-GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 8879 Information Processing - Text and Office Systems - Standard

Generalized Markup Language (SGML) (DoD Adopted)
(Application for copies should be addressed to Standardization Documents Order Desk,

Building 4D, 700 Robbins Avenue, Philadelphia PA 19111-5094, for issue to DoD activities.
Others may purchase copies from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd
Street, New York NY 10036.)
141
APPENDIX A
A.3 DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION.
A.3.1 SGML document type definition. The DTD associated with this appendix provides
the structure and content of documents prepared in accordance with this specification. The
DTD is available in digital format. See A.5 for information on obtaining the file. Data to be
delivered digitally in accordance with this specification shall be SGML tagged using the
DTD found in this Appendix. The procedure for accomplishing this is found in
MIL-PRF-28001 and ISO 8879.
A.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION.
A.4.1 Document type definition. The DTD within this appendix provides the structure and
content of documents prepared in accordance with this specification. The DTD is available
in a digital format. See A.5, for information on obtaining the file.
A.4.2 Tag description table. The Tag Description Table (TDT) provides detailed
descriptions of the tags and provides the element tagging structure, full element name, tag
minimization requirements, element structure, referencing elements, source paragraph,
and attribute descriptions unique to the element. See A.5, for information on obtaining this
table.
A.5 OBTAINING FILES.
A.5.1 Obtaining files. The files contained in these appendixes are for convenience and
informational purposes only. The current DTD, FOSI, screen FOSI, and TDT are available
for download as ASCII files. These files may be obtained directly from the preparing
activity’s world wide web site at: http://www.ide.wpafb.af.mil/tmss/index.html.
142
APPENDIX B
SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT MANUALS

DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION SUBSET
B.1 SCOPE.
B.1.1 Scope. This appendix provides the special or unique criteria, in addition to the
provisions of this specification, required for the development of supplemental flight
manuals. The markup tags described herein are based on rules outlined in MIL-PRF-28001
and ISO 8879. This Appendix is a mandatory part of this specification. The information
contained herein is intended for compliance. The document type definition (DTD)
referenced herein may be obtained directly from the preparing activity (see A.5). This
appendix is a mandatory part of this specification. The information contained herein is
intended for compliance.
B.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
B.2.1 Government documents.
B.2.1.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, standards,

otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those listed in the issue of the
Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DODISS) or
www.dsp.dla.mil. and supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation (see 6.2)
B.2.1.2 Non-government publications. The following document(s) form a part of this

document to the extent specified herein. Unless otherwise specified, the issues of the
documents which are DoD adopted are those cited in the solicitation or contract.
NON-GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS
International Organization for Standardization (ISO)
ISO 8879 Information Processing - Text and Office Systems - Standard

Generalized Markup Language (SGML) (DoD Adopted)
(Application for copies should be addressed to Standardization Documents Order Desk,

Building 4D, 700 Robbins Avenue, Philadelphia PA 19111-5094, for issue to DoD activities.
Others may purchase copies from the American National Standards Institute, 11 West 42nd
Street, New York NY 10036.).
143
APPENDIX B
SPECIFICATIONS
Military
MIL-PRF-28001 Markup Requirements and Generic Style Specification

for Electronic Printed Output and Exchange of Text
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of federal and military specifications, standards, and
handbooks are available from the Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 or www.dsp.dla.mil.)
B.3 DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION SUBSET.
B.3.1 SGML document type definition subset. The DTD associated with this appendix
provides the structure and content of documents prepared in accordance with this
specification to create supplemental flight manuals. The DTD is available in digital format.
See A.5 for information on obtaining the file. Data to be delivered digitally in accordance
with this specification shall be SGML tagged using the DTD found in this Appendix. The
procedure for accomplishing this is found in MIL-PRF-28001 and ISO 8879.
B.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION.
B.4.1 Document type definition. The DTD within this appendix provides the structure and
content of documents prepared in accordance with this specification. The DTD is available
in a digital format. See A.5, for information on obtaining this file.
B.4.2 Tag description table. The Tag Description Table (TDT) provides detailed
table.
144
MIL-PRF-7700G (USAF)
APPENDIX C
ABBREVIATED FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS

DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION
C.1 SCOPE.
C.1.1 Scope. This appendix provides the special or unique criteria, in addition to the
provisions of this specification, required for the development of a flight manual. The
markup tags described herein are based on rules outlined in MIL-PRF-28001 and ISO 8879.
This Appendix is a mandatory part of this specification. The information contained herein
is intended for compliance. The document type definition (DTD) referenced herein may be
obtained directly from the preparing activity (see A.5). This appendix is a mandatory part
of this specification. The information contained herein is intended for compliance.
C.2 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS.
C.2.1 Government documents.
C.2.1.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, standards,

otherwise specified, the issues of these documents are those listed in the issue of the
Department of Defense Index of Specifications and Standards (DODISS) or
www.dsp.dla.mil and supplement thereto, cited in the solicitation (see 6.2).
SPECIFICATIONS
Military
MIL-PRF-28001 Markup Requirements and Generic Style Specification

for Electronic Printed Output and Exchange of Text
(Unless otherwise indicated, copies of federal and military specifications, standards, and
handbooks are available from the Standardization Documents Order Desk, 700 Robbins
Avenue, Building 4D, Philadelphia, PA 19111-5094 or www.dsp.dla.mil..)
C.3 DOCUMENT TYPE DEFINITION.
C.3.1 Document type definition. The DTD associated with this appendix provides the
structure and content of documents prepared in accordance with this specification. The
DTD is available in digital format. See A.5 for information on obtaining the file. Data to
be delivered digitally in accordance with this specification shall be SGML tagged using
the DTD found in this Appendix. The procedure for accomplishing this is found in
MIL-PRF-28001 and ISO 8879.
C.4 DETAILED DESCRIPTION.

145
MIL-PRF-7700G (USAF)
APPENDIX C
C.4.1 Document type definition. The DTD within this appendix provides the structure and
content of an abbreviated flight crew checklists prepared in accordance with this
specification. The DTD is available in a digital format. See A.5, for information on
obtaining the file.
C.4.2 Tag description table. The Tag Description Table (TDT) provides detailed
table.
146
INDEX
Abbreviated checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Abbreviated flight crew checklist requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Page numbering for Class 1 and 2 checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Abbreviated checklist content requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Checklist title page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Class 1 and 2 checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Class 3 (scroll) checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Format and arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Introduction for Class 1 and 2 checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
List of effective pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Performance data for Class 1 and 2 checklists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Source and sequence of checklist data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Takeoff and landing data (TOLD) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Acronyms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Additional charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 106, 113
Air refueling procedures
Part 1 - General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Part 2 - Flying safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Part 3 - Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Part 4 - Aerial refueling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Part nouns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Applicable documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Non-government publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Order of precedence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Other government documents, drawings, and publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Specifications, standards, and handbooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Changes from previous issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Chart explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 108
Commercial flight manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Concurrence of checklists with flight manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Content and arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102, 103, 106-108
Critical system malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Air refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Air refueling control time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Air refueling initial point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Air refueling rendezvous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Alternate rendezvous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Altitude blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Breakaway . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
147
INDEX
Buddy takeoff/departure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Contact position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Controlled airspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Disconnect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Drag index number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Emergency descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
En route rendezvous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Hot armament . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Intermediate stops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
Join-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Miscellaneous emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Observation position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Offset (track) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Overrun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Point parallel rendezvous procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Post air refueling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Precontact (ready) position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Radar station keeping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Radio silence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rendezvous equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Reverse flow air refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Toboggan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Turn range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Detailed description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Document type definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Document type definition subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Documentation of deviations or additional requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Flight manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Air conditioning system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Air data computer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Air turbine motor/ram air turbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Aircraft dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Aircraft general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Aircraft gross weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Anti-icing and de-icing systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Armament/weapons system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Associated engine systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Automatic flight control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auxiliary flight reference system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Auxiliary power units (APU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Avionics equipment cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Bleed air supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Canopies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Cargo accommodations and aerial delivery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
148
INDEX
Circuit breakers and fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 32
Communications and avionics equipment table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Communications and avionics systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Compartment heat systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Doors, hatches and ladders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Drag chutes and arresting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Electrical power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Electrical system schematic diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Emergency procedure notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Engine fire extinguisher system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine fuel control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Engine instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine oil system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Engine operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine overheat and fire detection system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Engine thrust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Flight control systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flight instrument terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Flight instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Foreword/Preface/Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Front matter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Fuel quantity data table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Fuel supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Ground steering system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Hydraulic power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Integrated flight displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Interior arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Landing gear system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Lighting system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
List of effective pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
List of illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
List of time compliance technical orders (TCTOs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Main differences table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Main table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Miscellaneous equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Mission equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Navigation system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Navigational aids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Oil supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Oxygen systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Personnel accommodations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Pitot static system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Pneumatic power supply system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Pressurization system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Seats, ejection seats, and modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
149
INDEX
Section I - Description and operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Servicing diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Speed brake system and spoiler system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Stall limiter system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Starting and priming system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Stores coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Supersedure notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Supplemental manual reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Tables of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Title pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Trainer version aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Verification status page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Windshield rain removal system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Wing flaps, slat system, and boundary layer control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Wing fold systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Wing sweep system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Government documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2, 145
Illustrations (Section III) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Introductory text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 88, 102, 103, 107, 108
List of charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 88, 102, 103, 107, 108
Manifold pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Mission crew manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Additional sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Front matter (mission crew manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Section I Description and theory of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section II Normal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section III Emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section IV Malfunction analysis and alternate procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Section V In-flight repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Sections (mission crew manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Monitoring aircraft performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Acquisition requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Obtaining files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Part 1 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Part 4 - Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Part 5 - Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Part 6 - Endurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Part 7 - Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Part 8 - Approach and landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Part 9 - Mission planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Performance data
Acceleration check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Acceleration check speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
150
INDEX
Acceleration check time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Accounting for wind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Additional charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107, 108, 110, 118
Air minimum control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100, 109
Air temperature scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Aircraft gross weight and CG position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Airspeed installation correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Airspeed scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Altitude scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Angle of attack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Assist takeoff ignition time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Baseline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Basic takeoff chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Basis for wind correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Bordered title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Ceiling terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
CG correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Chart construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chart data basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74, 107
Chart entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chart explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82, 93, 102, 104, 107, 109, 111
Chart format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Chart layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Chart requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Climb speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Climb terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Climbout factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Climbout flight path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Combat speeds, fuel allowances, level flight acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Compressibility correction to CAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Correction grids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Critical field length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Crosswind landing gear position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Cruise (range and endurance with compressibility effects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cruise (range and endurance without compressibility effects) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Cruise (range and endurance) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Cruise terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Density altitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Descent chart data basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Description of charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Diversion range summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Drag due to asymmetric loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Drag Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Drag index scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Drag number table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
151
INDEX
Effect of bank angle on maximum endurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Engine operating limits (reciprocating engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
EPR, core speed or fan speed (turbofan engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Examples on charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Extent of coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Factors affecting approach and landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Factors affecting climb performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Factors affecting descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Factors affecting endurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Flap setting correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Flare distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Format for data presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Formatting speeds and altitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Forward support area operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fuel consumption during ground operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fuel consumption from brake release to flaps-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Fuel consumption/jettison . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Fuel flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Fuel flow (turboshaft engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fuel flow conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
General information charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Graphical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Grid spacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Gridlines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Ground minimum control speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Headwind influence on maximum gross weight for hovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Headwind influence on power required to hover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Helicopters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Identification of marginal operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
In-flight data card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Interception of lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Labels for curve(s) within a chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Landing crosswind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Landing distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Landing speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Limitations and restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Mach number correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Maximum abort speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Maximum airspeed for blade stall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Maximum braking speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Maximum endurance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Maximum gross weight for hovering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Minimum afterburner blowout speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Minimum go speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Minimum height for safe landing after engine failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Minimum safe single-engine takeoff speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Mission planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
152
INDEX
Monitoring aircraft performance during takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Nomographs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Optimum step climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Performance data charts and text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Performance ground rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Performance manual requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pitot static installation correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Power (torque or thrust) available in-flight (turboprop engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power available . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power deterioration check (turboshaft engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Power required to hover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Power schedule (reciprocating engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Power setting check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Power-on landing distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Range of chart parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Range summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Range terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
RCR correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Reciprocating engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Reduced power/thrust takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Refusal speed/critical engine failure speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
RSC correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Sample charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Sample problems for charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Service ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Single-engine capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Slope correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Specific chart requirements (also applies to helicopters) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Specific configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Specific range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Standard atmosphere . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Standard charts and tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Standard-day temperature correction scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Takeoff and landing crosswind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Takeoff and landing data (TOLD) card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Takeoff chart parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Takeoff chart presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Takeoff distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Takeoff factors for reciprocating engine aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff factors for turbine powered aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff factors for turboprop aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff factors/thrust factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff factors/thrust factors for turbine powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff graphic illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
153
INDEX
Takeoff gross weight limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Takeoff ground run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Takeoff performance data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Takeoff speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Temperature conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Temperature correction for compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Temperature scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Terminology applicable to approach and landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Terminology applicable to winds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Time, distance, and fuel to climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Time, distance, and fuel to climb initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Title block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Title block information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Torque and fuel flow correction for air bleed on. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Total obstacle clearance distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Transfer scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
True Mach number - CAS/IAS conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
True Mach number - TAS conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Turboshaft engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Water takeoff run for amphibian aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Weight scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Wind direction and velocity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Wind velocity correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Propeller malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Abbreviated checklist pages for flight manual supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Abbreviated checklist requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Abbreviations and symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Aircraft affected by modification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Aircraft designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Aircrew notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Airspeeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Callouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Changes to the flight manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Checklist notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Class 1 supplement pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Class 2 supplement pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Codes for types of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Complexity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Consistency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Coordinated action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Duplication of procedures or techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Equipment location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Experience level of intended operating personnel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Exterior of aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Flight manual procedural requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
154
INDEX
Function of the manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
General arrangement diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
General requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
High risk areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Identification of various groups of aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Instruction notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Instrument accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Lengthy procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Multipurpose controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Nomenclature for control positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Nomenclature for equipment, controls, and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Operating limitations and restrictions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Panels and consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Paragraph headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Presentation of procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Procedure amplifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Procedures for checklist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Quoting of numerical values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
References to other publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
References within the manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety and operational supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Schematic (flow) diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Security classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Selection of headings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Standard terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Status page for change packages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Status page for flight crew manual supplements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Supplement title page changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Systems, controls, and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Types of illustrations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Use of "system" and "general . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Use of color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warnings, cautions, and notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1, 141, 145
Types of manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Section II - Normal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
After takeoff climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Automatic approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Before inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Before landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Before starting engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Before takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Before taxiing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Checklist program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
155
INDEX
Circling Approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Climb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Danger areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Engine ground operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Engine run-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Exterior inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Flight characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Flight crew duties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Flight crew normal duties/procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Flight planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Holding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Instrument approaches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Interior inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Introductory material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Line up. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Passenger briefing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Preflight check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Sequence of phases, actions, inspections, and checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Special inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Special type takeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Starting engines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Takeoff and landing data card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Takeoff, landing, instrument approach, and missed approach diagr . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Taxiing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Turning radius and ground clearance diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Weight and balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Section II Normal procedures
After landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Alert procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Arrangement of the alert procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Before leaving aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Engine shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Explanatory material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Go around/missed approach . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Hot refueling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Postflight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Touch and go landings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Section III - Emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Abort and barrier engagement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Canopy or hatch retention or jettisoning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Crew environment emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Criteria for critical emergency steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
156
INDEX
Criteria for determining critical emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Critical emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Ejection or bailout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Electrical fire and overheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Emergency brake system operation during taxi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Emergency descent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Emergency ground egress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Engine failure during takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Engine failure under various conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Engine fire during flight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Engine fire or overheat during start or shutdown . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Engine restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Fire or overheat light during takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Fire, smoke and fumes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Flight without canopy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Fuselage and wing fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
General emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Ground operation emergency procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
In-flight emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Jettisoning external stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Landing gear retraction while on the ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Loss of nose landing gear steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Minimum control speeds (air and ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Narrative versus numerical presentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Operation of seat type survival kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Out of control procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Phase of operation arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Spin recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
System arrangement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
System failures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Takeoff emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Takeoff with one or more engines inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Tire failure during takeoff roll . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Section III Emergency procedures
Ditching (applicable aircraft) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Ditching and crash landing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Ditching chart and sea state table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Emergency egress . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Emergency entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Forced landing or landing with one or more engines inoperative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Hung ordnance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Landing emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Landing gear malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Landing without brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Maximum glide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Miscellaneous emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
157
INDEX
Miscellaneous emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Other landing emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Shock effects to engine or aircraft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Simulated forced landing or flame-out landing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Smoke identification diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Structural failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
System emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Takeoff, landing and missed approach - one or more engines inope . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Warning/caution advisory (WCA) display analysis illustration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Section IV - Mission crew duties/procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Crew coordination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Sequence of phases and actions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Section V - Operating limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Acceleration limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Airspeed and mach limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Alternate fluid limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Alternate load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Barrier limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Brake energy limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Center of gravity limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Disposal of cargo and stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Drag chute limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Emergency crew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Emergency fuel limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Engine limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Flight maneuvering limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Fuel and external disposal tanks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Fuel versus alternate load capacity envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Gross weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Hovering limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Instrument markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Landing limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Operating weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Other limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Propeller limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Rotor limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Single-engine/engine-out flight limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Starter limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Stores . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Summary table of limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Weight limitation chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Weight limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
158
INDEX
Weight limitations chart requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Weight limiting factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Section VI - Flight characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Abnormal flight characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Aircraft unique characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Control effectiveness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Control forces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Departures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Dive recovery characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Engine operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Flight control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Flight with asymmetric loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Normal flight characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Roll coupling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Single-engine/engine-out flight characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Spins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Stalls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Unusual attitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Section VII - Adverse weather operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Cold weather, hot weather, and desert/tropical operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Effects of ice and snow on runways, taxiways, and ramps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Hydroplaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Snow, ice, rain, fog, and slush . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Turbulence and thunderstorms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Wind shear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Section VIII - Aerial refueling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Deviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
SGML document type definition subset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Subject term (key word) listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Supplemental manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Content and format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Coverage within sections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Foreword/Preface/Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Main table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Section titles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Tables of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Title page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Table of contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 88, 102, 103, 106, 107
Tag description table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Technical manual acquisition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Technical manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Time compliance technical orders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Verification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
159
INDEX
Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Minimum verification requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Custodian Preparing Activity
Air Force - 16 Air Force -16
Review Activities
Air Force 10, 11 (Project TMSS -F644)
160
STANDARDIZATION DOCUMENT IMPROVEMENT PROPOSAL
INSTRUCTIONS
1. The preparing activity must complete blocks 1, 2, 3, and 8. In block 1, both the document number and revision letter
should be given.
2. The submitter of this form must complete blocks 4, 5, 6, and 7, and send to preparing activity.
3. The preparing activity must provide a reply within 30 days from receipt of the form.
NOTE: This form may not be used to request copies of documents, nor to request waivers, or clarification of
requirements on current contracts. Comments submitted on this form do not constitute or imply authorization to waive
any portion of the referenced document(s) or to amend contractual requirements.
1. DOCUMENT NUMBER 2. DOCUMENT DATE (YYYYMMDD)
I RECOMMEND A CHANGE: MIL-DTL-7700G (USAF) 20020513
3. DOCUMENT TITLE
Detail Specification Flight Manuals, Air Refueling Procedures, and

4. NATURE OF CHANGE (Identify paragraph number and include proposed rewrite, if possible. Attach extra sheets as needed.)
5. REASON FOR RECOMMENDATION
6. SUBMITTER
a. NAME (Last, First, Middle Initial) b. ORGANIZATION
c. ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code) d. TELEPHONE (Include Area Code) 7. DATE SUBMITTED
(1) Commercial (YYYYMMDD)
(2) DSN
(If applicable)
8. PREPARING ACTIVITY
a. NAME b. TELEPHONE (Include Area Code)
(1) Commercial (937)904-0786 (2) DSN 674-0786
MSG/MMF
c. ADDRESS (Include ZIP Code) IF YOU DO NOT RECEIVE A REPLY WITHIN 45 DAYS, CONTACT:
Defense Standardization Program Office (DLSC-LM)
4375 Chidlaw Road, Suite 008 8725 John J. Kingman Road, Suite 2533
Wright-Patterson AFB 45433-5008 Fort Belvoir, Virginia 22060-6221
Telephone (703) 767-6888 DSN 427-6888
DD FORM 1426, FEB 1999 (EG) PREVIOUS EDITION IS OBSOLETE. WHS/DIOR, Feb 99

Mil DTL 7700G

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mil DTL 7700G

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Downloaded from http://www.everyspec.

AMSC F7030 AREA TMSS

Distribution Statement A. Approved for public release; distribution is unlimited.

Flight Manual (eight sections) (see 3.3, 3.3.10, and 6.2)

Performance Data Manual (see 3.4)

Mission Crew Manual (see 3.5)

Supplemental Manual (see 3.6)

2.2 Government documents.

2.2.1 Specifications, standards, and handbooks. The following specifications, standards,

MIL-PRF-5096 Military Specification, Manuals Technical:

MIL-STD-38784 Manuals, Technical - General Style and

Joint Service Specification Guides

JSSG-2001 Air Vehicle

JSSG-2006 Aircraft Structures

JSSG-2010 Crew Systems

MIL-HDBK-1221 Manuals, Commercial Off-The-Shelf (COTS)

MIL-HDBK-1793 Flight Performance, Air Vehicle

MIL-HDBK-1797 Flying Qualities of Piloted Aircraft

Air Force Technical Manuals

TO 1-1B-50 Weight and Balance

Air Force Policy

AFH 11-203 Weather for Aircrews

AFMAN 11-217 Instrument Flying

AFI 11-215 Flight Manual Procedures

AFI 13-203 Air Traffic Control

(Copies of documents required by contractors in connection with specific procurement

Government Printing Office Publication 310.1 Quality Assurance Through

2.3 Non-government publications. The following document(s) forms a part of this

U.S. Standard Atmosphere, 1976

(Application for copies should be addressed to the Superintendent of Documents, US

a. The flight manual (including supplemental and mission crew manual)

b. Critical emergency and minimum reaction items shall be prepared in

c. Performance data shall be published as a separate manual, or when

d. Tables, charts, and graphs shall be considered illustrations and shall

e. Paragraph numbering shall be in accordance with MIL-STD-38784,

f. Section and part headings shall be 18-point boldface uppercase.

g. Sideheads shall conform to the following:

(1) Primary sideheads: 14-point, boldface, uppercase letters, with no

(2) First subordinate sideheads: 10-point, boldface, uppercase letters,

(3) Second subordinate sideheads: 10-point, boldface, uppercase and

(4) Third subordinate sideheads: 10-point, lightface, uppercase

(5) Fourth and all subsequent sideheads: 10-point, lightface

h. Subsection headings shall be 16-point, boldface, uppercase letters. A

i. Page numbers for flight, supplemental, and mission crew manuals

shall be as specified in MIL-STD-38784. Page numbers of the

3.2.3 Duplication of procedures or techniques. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply,

3.2.5 References within the manual. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply.

3.2.5.1 References. General temperature references, in air refueling procedures, shall be

3.2.6 References to other publications. The requirements of MIL-STD-38784 apply. As a

FIGURE 1. Example of supplement title page.

AIRCREW FLIGHT MANUAL BASIC DATE CHANGE NO./ DATE

T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1 1 JUL 82 24 30 NOV 91

FLIGHT CREW CHECKLISTS BASIC DATE CHANGE NO./ DATE

T.O. 1E-3A-43-1-1CL-4 1 JUL 82 22 21 OCT 91

SAFETY AND OPERATIONAL

1S-63 12 DEC 91 SRCP 1C/2C DELIVERY

INCORPORATED, RESCINDED, OR DELETED SUPPLEMENTS

1S-38 15 DEC 90 INCORPORATED IN CHG 13

FIGURE 2. Example Supplement Status page.

(TO 1F-4(R)C-1S-275) TO 1F-4(R)C-1CL-1

1. Wheel Brakes - TEST

14. External transfer switch - AS DESIRED

OPERATIONAL SUPPLEMENT Change 3 2-17